JP6393236B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of giving a player a game value when a game result is a predetermined special result.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that can switch an effect stage based on a prefetch result is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-202938 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the interest of the game could not be enhanced.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine capable of giving a game value to a player when a game result is a predetermined special result,
A display device capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A stage selected from a plurality of stage stages can be set, and music corresponding to the selected stage can be output from a speaker , and the stage can be switched according to the progress of the music. Production stage control means for determining the switchable timing ,
The music includes a first section and a second section after the first section,
The production stage control means includes:
It is possible to output the first section and the second section a plurality of times by repeatedly outputting the music from the speaker.
When the progress status of the music is the first section of the first time, the effect stage is switched after the end of the first section, and when the progress status of the music is the first section of the second time or later. When the stage is switched to the first section and the progress of the music is the first section and the second section after the second section, the switchable timing is set so that the stage is switched to the second section. Decide
In the selected stage, when the display device is executing an effect specific to the selected stage that can suggest that the result of the game becomes a special result during the execution of the game, the switching is performed. Even if it is possible timing, do not switch from the selected stage to another stage,
In the selected stage, when the display device is executing a common stage that can suggest that the result of the game becomes a special result during the execution of the game, the switching is performed. The stage can be switched from the selected stage to another stage at a possible timing.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be enhanced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of an information display device. It is a figure explaining the detail of an effect operation part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining a common figure change display game. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability variation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a process shift setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2. FIG. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process for small hitting fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process for setting transition for small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "production point control" and "probability change / non-probability change symbol switching control". It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control". It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control". It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control". It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control". It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control". It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control". It is a figure explaining an example of "stage change control". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "clockwork effect production". It is a figure explaining an example of "surprise / small hit effect". It is a figure explaining an example of "surprise / small hit effect". It is a figure explaining an example of "surprise / small hit effect". It is a figure explaining an example of "surprise / small hit effect". It is a figure explaining an example of "surprise / small hit effect". It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining an effect point control process. It is a flowchart explaining a stage change control process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of a small hit | end process. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of the special figure normal process transfer setting process.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 through a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 with a built-in lamp and the like for emitting light for decoration and production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect operation unit 550 that receives an operation input from the player is provided at the upper edge of the upper plate 21. The effect operation unit 550 is an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and the upper surface (press surface) of the effect button 25 is contacted by the player. A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. A key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect operation unit 550, in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect in which the player's operation is performed is performed. Can do.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3 are front views of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board production device 44 that produces a game effect by operating is provided at the upper, left, right, and lower portions of the center case 40. The board effect device (movable effect member) 44a provided on the upper part of the center case 40 can perform a slide movement operation (drop operation) from the state shown in FIG. Is possible. Further, the board effect devices (movable effect members) 44b and 44c provided on the left and right parts of the center case 40 can be slid and moved from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41. ing. Further, the board effect device 44d provided at the lower part of the center case 40 is a movable effect member simulating a timepiece, and has a rotating operation (standing operation) from the state shown in FIG. 3 to the state shown in FIG. In addition, it is possible to rotate the needle provided in the board effect device 44d.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 9).
In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 9).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 9).
In addition, instead of the central start winning port 36 provided separately from the normal variable winning device 37, a start winning device having a sorting member inside is provided, and the start opening switch shown in FIGS. (Start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a) may be provided to win alternately. In this case, the special figure variation display game is not a special figure 2 priority digestion but a winning order digestion. Furthermore, a special figure gate switch (gate switch 34a) may also be provided in the start prize-winning device so that the special figure 1 start prize, the special figure 2 start prize, and the usual figure gate pass may occur in order. In this case, the normal variation winning device 37 is also provided below the starting winning device, for example. Then, instead of not having a normal figure per day, a normal figure may occur at a predetermined rate, and the normal variation winning device 37 may be opened.

Further, an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided to the right of the starting winning opening 36.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right side, and a partition wall 37d that restricts the flow of the game ball. ing. The movable member 37b normally stands up to maintain a state where the distance from the partition wall 37d is equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball, that is, a closed state where the game ball cannot flow (a disadvantageous state for the player). Then, when the result of the general variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation prize winning device 37 by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 9) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 9).
Further, below the start winning port 36, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like is provided.

Further, a special variable winning device (large winning mouth) 38 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure changing display game is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Yes.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 9) as a driving device. During the state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player It has become. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 9) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two big prize opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by any of the big prize opening switches 38a. In this way, by providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim for winning at the start winning opening 36 by adjusting the firing force and firing the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim to win the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a warp device 42 is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The warp device 42 has an inflow port 42a that opens to the left for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40, and a cylindrical shape that guides the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 42a to the stage 42b. The game ball having a warp channel and flowing down the warp channel is guided to the left end of the stage 42b.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure) for a first special figure variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Fluctuation display unit) 51a (D1) and a special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 51b (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and a general figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps And display display units 53, 54 and 55 (D11 to D16) for informing the start memory number of each variable display game, which is also composed of LED lamps. Is provided.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 56 (D8) for notifying that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game. ), A second game state display unit (second game state indicator, time-short state notification unit) 57 (D9) that lights up when the time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state, the probability of jackpot when the gaming machine 10 is powered on A third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) 58 (D17) for displaying that the state is in a high probability state, the number of rounds at the big hit (opening and closing of the special variable winning device 38) Round display section 59 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of times) is provided. The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b is, for example, during execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, FIG. As shown in FIG. 6B and FIG. 6B, the central segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a, as shown in FIG. 5B, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is changing so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, as shown in FIG. 5C and FIG. 6C, as a winning result mode (special result mode), a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the off-result mode is lit. And display the game results.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 6 (a), the 16R normal big hit, the 16R positive variation A1 big hit which is the big hit in the probability variation symbol, and the big hit in the non-probability variation symbol. There are five types of big hits, a certain 16R probability variation A2a big hit, 16R probability variation A2b big hit, and 2R probability variation big hit. The probability of a big hit result of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 big hit probability) is “50/100” in the case of 16R normal big hit, “5/100” in the case of 16R probability variable A1 big hit, and 16R. The probability variation A2a big hit is “2/100”, the 16R probability variation A2b big hit is “2/100”, and the 2R probability variation big hit is “41/100”. In addition, the probability of the big hit result of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 big hit probability) is “50/100” in the case of 16R normal big hit, and “39/100” in the case of 16R probability variable A1 big hit. The 16R probability variation A2a big hit is “1/100”, the 16R probability variation A2b big hit is “1/100”, and the 2R probability variation big hit is “9/100”.
In this embodiment, the 16R probability variation A2b jackpot is in the same mode (gaming state) as the 16R normal jackpot after the special gaming state ends, so the 16R normal jackpot and the 16R probability variation A2b jackpot are after the special gaming state. In the short time state, the same variation pattern table is used up to a predetermined number of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 5 (c), two result forms are set as the result form of 16R probability variation A2a big hit and the result form of 16R probability variation A2a big hit. However, three or more result modes may be set. In the case of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), one result form is set as the result form for the 16R probability variation A2a big hit and the result form for the 16R probability change A2a big hit. The result mode may be set.
Moreover, it is preferable that the result mode of 2R probability variation big hit and the result mode of small hit are difficult to distinguish.

  The normal display 52 displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (d), when the symbol number for variation is “0” among the lamps D10 and D18 constituting the universal display 52, that is, the result of the game is off. Only the lamp D10 is lit, and when the symbol number for change is “1” (that is, when the game result is hit and the stop symbol number is “1”), only the lamp D18 is lit. When the symbol number for change is “2” (that is, when the game result is a hit and the symbol number for stoppage is “2”), both the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are turned on.

  Further, the general figure hold display 55 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general figure display 52 by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4C, when the number of holdings is “0” among the lamps D15 and D16 constituting the general-purpose holding indicator 55, both the lamps D15 and D16 are turned on. When the hold number is “1”, only the lamp D15 is turned on. When the hold number is “2”, both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on, and when the hold number is “3”. Is configured such that the lamp D15 is blinked and the lamp D16 is lit, and both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are blinked when the holding number is “4”. The blinking cycle is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

  The special figure 1 hold indicator 53 indicates the number of first start memories (special figure 1 hold) that is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 1 display 51a, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the special figure 1 start memory number is “0” among the lamps D11 and D12 constituting the special figure 1 hold indicator 53, the lamp D11 and Both lamps D12 are turned off. When the special figure 1 start memory number is "1", only the lamp D11 is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "2", both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on. Is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "3", the lamp D11 is blinked and the lamp D12 is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "4", the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on. Both are configured to blink. The blinking cycle is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

  The special figure 2 hold indicator 54 indicates the number of the second start memory (special figure 2 hold) that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 2 display 51b, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the special figure 2 start memory number is “0” among the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special figure 2 holding display 54, the lamp D13 and Both lamps D14 are turned off. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "1", only the lamp D13 is turned on. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "2", both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are set. Is turned on, and when the special figure 2 starting memory number is "3", the lamp D13 is blinked and the lamp D14 is turned on. When the special figure 2 starting memory number is "4", the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on. Both are configured to blink. The blinking cycle is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

  The first game state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 56 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. ), The lamp is turned off, and in the gaming state (right-handed state) where right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (short time state notifying unit) 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and, for example, as shown in FIG. When the function is not activated, the lamp is turned off, and when the time-short state occurs (when the variable time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

  The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, for example, when the special game state based on the big hit is not in effect, the lamp is turned off, and during the special game state, it corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result Set the lamp to light up. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4E, among the lamps D3 to D7 constituting the round display unit 59, when the selected number of rounds is “16”, the lamps D3, D5, and D7 are turned on. When the number of rounds selected is “2”, the lamps D4 and D6 are turned on. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, in the lower right part of the center case 40, a fourth symbol display for executing the decoration special figure fluctuation display game separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 is displayed. An information display device 60 for displaying the start memory number is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the information display device 60 includes six LED lamps. As shown in FIG. 7B, among the lamps L1 to L6 constituting the information display device 60, the lamp L1 is the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game. It is the special figure 1 4th design LED which displays. The lamp L2 is a special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the second special diagram variation display game. The lamps L3 and L4 are special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 for displaying the first start memory number, and the lamps L5 and L6 are special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 for displaying the second start memory number.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (d), the lamps L1 and L2 indicate that the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating by blinking the LED, and the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. The game result is displayed as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the game result. In the case of this embodiment, when it is off, it is turned off, and when it is big hit or small hit, it is turned on. Note that the display mode in the case of the small hit may be different from the display mode different from the big hit. For example, you may make it blink in the aspect different from the blink in the fluctuation | variation. The blinking cycle is set to 200 milliseconds, for example.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7E, the lamps L3 and L4 are the first start memory (the special figure 1 hold) which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 1 display 51a. Is displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of this embodiment, when the special figure 1 start memory number is “0”, both the lamp L3 and the lamp L4 are turned off, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is “1”, only the lamp L3 is turned on. When the special figure 1 start memory number is "2", both the lamp L3 and the lamp L4 are turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "3", the lamp L3 is blinked and the lamp L4 is turned on. When the number of stored starting figures is “4”, both the lamp L3 and the lamp L4 are in a blinking state. The blinking cycle is set to 200 milliseconds, for example.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (e), the lamps L5 and L6 are stored in the second start memory (the special figure 2 hold) which is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 2 display 51b. Is displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of this embodiment, when the special figure 2 start memory number is “0”, both the lamp L5 and the lamp L6 are turned off, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is “1”, only the lamp L5 is turned on. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "2", both the lamp L5 and the lamp L6 are turned on, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is "3", the lamp L5 is blinked and the lamp L6 is turned on. The lamp L5 and the lamp L6 are both in a blinking state when the lighting state is "4". The blinking cycle is set to 200 milliseconds, for example.

  Note that the brightness of the information display device 60 may be adjusted so that the game is not affected. As a method for adjusting the brightness, there are a method for decreasing the value of the current flowing through the LED by resistance, a method for adjusting by software control such as PWM control, a method using these in combination, and the like.

By providing the information display device 60 separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 can be effectively utilized without occupying the display area of the display device 41 by displaying the fourth symbol. In the case where a movable effect member or the like is provided, the information display device 60 is placed at a position that does not fall within the operation range of the movable effect member so that the information display device 60 is not covered during the operation. Deploy. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed not on the information display device 60 but on the display device 41. In this case, the fourth symbol is displayed at a position that is not concealed by the effect member or the like so that it can always be seen. In addition, when a movable effect member or the like is provided, it is displayed at a position that does not fall within the operation range of the movable effect member or the movable effect so that the fourth pattern is not covered during the operation. According to the operation of the member, it can be visually recognized by moving to a position that does not fall within the operating range.
Further, the number of special figure start memories stored is displayed on the lamps L3 and L4 and the lamps L5 and L6 of the information display device 60 and also on the display device 41 as a decorative special figure start memory display. You may display the numerical display showing the memory | storage number of special figure starting memory on the apparatus 41. FIG. In addition, the numerical display can be left displayed in a part (for example, a corner) of the display area of the display device 41 even when the decoration special figure start memory display cannot be displayed due to effects or the like.

  FIG. 8 shows details of the effect operation unit 550. FIG. 8A is a plan view of the effect operation unit 550. As shown in FIG. 8A, the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment includes an effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. Has been. That is, the rendering operation unit 550 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to a physical push button function.

  Sensitivity setting data, LED luminance data, and the like are transmitted from the production control board (production control device) 300 to the production operation unit 550, and a production button is provided from the production operation unit 550 to the production control board (production control device) 300. A push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a provided in the (push button) 25 and a touch ON / OFF signal (contact / non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a provided in the touch panel 29 are output. It is configured to be.

  In the case of the present embodiment, an operation button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the effect button (push button) 25 is used to press the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (an operation to push the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 and depress the effect operation unit 550). ) Is detected. In addition, a plurality of points are provided on the top surface of the rendering operation unit 550, and a touch operation with respect to the points provided on the top surface of the rendering operation unit 550 is detected by a touch sensor included in the touch panel 29.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, as a plurality of points, nine points of “TSW1” to “TSW8” and “Pa” points are provided. More specifically, the “TSW4” point provided at the center of the top surface of the production operation unit 550, the “TSW1” point provided on the left side of the “TSW4” point, and the back side from the “TSW4” point (game "TSW3" point provided on the board 30 side), "TSW6" point provided on the right side of the "TSW4" point, and "TSW8" provided on the near side (player side) from the "TSW4" point Point, “TSW2” point provided between “TSW1” point and “TSW3” point, “TSW5” point provided between “TSW3” point and “TSW6” point, and “TSW6” Between the “TSW7” point provided between the points and the “TSW8” point, and between the “TSW8” point and the “TSW1” point And "Pa" point, which is provided, is provided. The number of points is not limited to nine and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. In FIG. 8B, for convenience, the points “TSW1” to “TSW8” are indicated as “TSW1” to “TSW8”, respectively. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

  The points at which the touch operation can be detected by the touch sensor of the touch panel 29 are eight points “TSW1” to “TSW8”, and the touch operation is not detected at the “Pa” point. Of course, the contact operation may be detected also at the “Pa” point. In addition, each of nine points of the “TSW1” to “TSW8” points and the “Pa” points has LEDs of independent systems (full color LEDs in the case of the present embodiment).

  The “Pa” point is, for example, that the LED of the “Pa” point is used as a notification lamp for one-shot notification, or that the LED of each point on the top surface of the production operation unit 550 is turned on sequentially like a roulette. Can be used for deterministic effects, such as using the LED at the “accurate (or probability change confirmation)” point, or using the LED at the “Pa” point for a certain effect of prefetching.

  Here, the lighting brightness of the LEDs for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (specifically, the LEDs arranged at the “TSW1” to “TSW8” points, the “Pa” points, etc.) is adjusted by brightness adjustment (hole setting). , And player adjustments) are excluded. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is constant without being affected by the brightness adjustment. In addition, the touch sensor forcibly turns off the touch when the touch-on state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)) (stops the output of the touch-on signal and turns off the touch. Signal output function). That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured not to detect a continuous contact operation for a predetermined time or longer.

  As the player's operation detected by such an effect operation unit 550, for example, an operation shown in FIG. “Single stroke” is an operation in which the production operation unit 550 is pressed once, and “continuous stroke” is an operation in which the production operation unit 550 is pressed several times at intervals within a predetermined time. “Long press” is an operation in which the effect operation unit 550 is kept pressed for a predetermined time or more, and “touch” is an operation to touch the touch panel 29. “Pa” operation (TSW1or8) + long press ”is long in a state in which one (or both) of the“ Pa ”point or two adjacent points“ TSW1 ”and“ TSW8 ”is touched. “Flick” is an operation of sliding to touch the touch panel 29 and play it. Of course, the operation to detect is not limited to these operations.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is changed to the payout control device 200 ( From the dispensing unit controlled by FIG. 9), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 9) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 55 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual map variation display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a variation display unit (general map display) 52 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 52 is constituted by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the normal figure changing display game is a normal figure specifying result, the normal figure is hit and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 9). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the memory display section for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 (the special figure 1 hold display 53 and the special figure 2 hold display 54), Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 is configured to display the special figure 1 indicator 51a (variable display device) or the special figure 2 indicator 51b (variable display) on the basis of winning at the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or their start memory. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. As a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51a or the special figure 2 display 51b becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode. Further, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51a or the special figure 2 display 51b is the small hit result mode, the small hit game state (so-called so-called game state) , A small hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the small hit result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  Note that the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure change display is not performed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is to be executed (executed with priority).

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is subtracted by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable winning device 37) in the state of not being played, in the special game state or in the small hit game state, if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number, The start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state, At the end of the small hit gaming state), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not limited in particular, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of special results is different (expected values are different) as reach effects: normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach) Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) and special 3 reach (SP3 reach) are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. And get. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning apparatus 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. . Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening / closing data. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the common symbol display 52, a process for displaying a common symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display 52, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of order, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display 52.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b for a predetermined time, a special figure variation display game to be stopped is displayed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode and the small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, processing for generating a special gaming state or a small hit gaming state is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, for example, the CPU 111A can open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable prize device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b and allow the game ball to flow into the big prize opening. Control is performed. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. At this time, in the short state, the probability (probability per ordinary figure) that is the hit result of the ordinary map change display game is set to a high probability (ordinary figure high probability state) higher than 0 that is the normal probability (ordinary figure low probability state) It is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 11A, the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment is a movable member when the gaming state at the start of variation is a normal gaming state (ordinary low probability state). If the probability per base figure is set to “0/251” so as not to release 37b, and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a general high probability state, the probability per base figure is “250/251”. Is set to
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 11B, the execution time of the usual figure change display game (ordinary figure change time) is the case where the game state at the start of change is the normal game state (ordinary figure low probability state). It is the same as when the time is short (normal high probability state). For example, when “variation pattern 1” is selected as the normal variation pattern, “500 ms” is selected, and “variation pattern 2” is selected. In this case, “1500 msec” is set, and when “variation pattern 3” is selected, “3000 msec” is set. Also, the normal stoppage time for displaying the results of the normal map display game is the same in the normal game state (normal low probability state) and in the short time state (high normal probability state) For example, it is set to be “600 milliseconds”.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 11C, “variation pattern 1” is selected with a probability of “198/256” as a normal variation pattern, and “variation pattern 2” is selected with a probability of “32/256”. Then, “variation pattern 3” is selected with a probability of “26/256”. In addition, since the probability per universal figure in the ordinary low probability state is 0, that is, in the ordinary low probability state, the winning is not selected, so in the “low probability state (ordinary figure low probability state)”, “win” Does not fall under. Therefore, it is “×” in FIG.
In the case of the present embodiment, the game state at the time of start of change (at the start of the normal figure change display game) is referred to, and the winning / disappearance, the normal figure stop symbol, and the normal figure change time are determined. Yes. In addition, even if the game state changes during the execution of the usual figure display game (during fluctuation), it will not affect the hit / miss of the game being executed, the figure stop symbol, and the figure change time. It is configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, an opening pattern (general power release pattern) for releasing the normal fluctuation winning device 37 when the normal figure change display game is the winning result is used when the symbol is determined (when the normal figure stop symbol is determined). ) Is determined with reference to the gaming state, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), the public power release pattern is a case where the gaming state at the time of symbol determination is a normal gaming state (ordinary figure low probability state) For example, when the symbol number for variation is “1”, “open pattern A” is selected, and when the symbol number for variation is “2”. “Open pattern B” is selected. For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (e), when “open pattern A” is selected, the open time (general power open time) is 1000 msec, and the open count (general power open count) is 3 times. When “open pattern B” is set, the opening time (normal power release time) is set to 2400 milliseconds, and the number of times of opening (the number of open power calls) is set to two.
And even if the gaming state changes during execution of the normal power release operation, the normal power release pattern of the operation being executed is not affected.
In addition, the probability per base figure in the normal low probability state is 0, but when reference is necessary (for example, the game state at the start of variation (ie, the game state when determining hit / loss) is normal. In the case of the figure high probability state, and the game state at the time of symbol determination (the game state when determining the power transmission opening pattern) is the normal figure low probability state), the same pattern as in the normal figure high probability state Is configured to do. In addition, the probability per base figure in the normal figure low probability state is 0, but the hit / loss is determined by referring to the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation, and the public power release pattern refers to the gaming state at the time of symbol determination Therefore, when the game state when determining the hit / loss is a normal high probability state, and when the game state when determining the general power release pattern is a low probability state, The “low probability state (ordinary low probability state)” may correspond to “one hit” or “two hits”. Therefore, it is not “x” in FIG.

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 milliseconds is 1352 milliseconds). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map variation display game (probability per normal map) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state, for example, 0/251) in the normal operation state. High probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of times of normal power release, the normal power release time, and the probability per normal time. Extend the time to change state more than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 and timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 14 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and a command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 13 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 13, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the special figure has a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and, for example, a high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the collective display device 50 is saved. Data) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) After saving to the area (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the winning symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) or the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and error monitoring ( A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) is performed to determine whether the front frame or the glass frame is open. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the special game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winnings of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning prize switch 38a provided in the special variable winning apparatus 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and a big hit end process are performed. A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the process during the small hit A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “8”, a small hitting process (step A16) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. .
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51a (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51a is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 51b (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 51b is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at one start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not winning unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (start winning prize opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table is prepared for the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second starting opening. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that there is no unauthorized power transmission (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, no winning information of the start target to be monitored among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (normally variable winning device 37) is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first start opening (start winning opening 36) and the second start opening (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37), the winning information of the monitoring start opening is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the special drawing start port switch common process, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is obtained from the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count that is the output count to the external management device is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservation (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the RWM small hit symbol is selected. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start opening switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. The random number value stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 19, first, the start opening prize flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153).
In step A153, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that no big hit or small hit is being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit depending on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is a win (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first start opening (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first start opening is won (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is obtained. (Step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S166). A167).

  After that, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special winning opening is being opened (step A201). . When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).
If the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting middle processing is being performed (step A203). ).
When the small hitting process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hitting process is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress (step A204).
Since the special figure game process number does not move to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205.
Then, “0” is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 38a) (step A206).

  If there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 38a) (step A210). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207) and an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 38a) (step A210).

  If there is no input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is not “0” (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215).
If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
When the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of winning prizes (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes exceeds an upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step). A218).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or larger than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (Step A221). When it is not under mid-hit processing (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when under middle hit processing (step A221; Y), the big win mouth control pointer area is small hit. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the big prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0” (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A311). A311; N) sets a customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In step A301, if the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step A301; N), a special figure 2 change start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is executed. A reservation number command is prepared (step A303), and an effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.
In step A306, when the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step A306; N), a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is executed. A reserve number command is prepared (step A308), and an effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  As described above, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check. If the special figure 2 hold count is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-described special figure normal process and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) in the special figure display process described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A322), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (Step A323). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 23, first, the special figure fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 24, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 25 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A353), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A354). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 26 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A375). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 27 shows the big hit determination process (steps A154, A355, and A374) in the special figure hold information determination process, the big hit flag 1 setting process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out of line)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of place. Then, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 28 shows the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 29 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51a) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to the hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). Further, when a special big hit symbol (for example, 2R probability variation symbol or 16R probability variation A2b symbol) among the big hits in the special figure 1 is obtained, depending on whether or not the gaming state is being probability variation, the transition destination effect mode Whether to shift to a production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not it is a dedicated production mode in which the probability change is confirmed or whether it is a probability change. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). The small hit design random number is loaded from the design random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A417), and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and an effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 30 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is used for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 51b) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Further, in the case of this embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, regardless of the big hit symbol, the destination production mode becomes a dedicated production mode in which the probability change is confirmed. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and an effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2. The stop symbol setting process ends.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning opening 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, and A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first-half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold count and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of step (step A474). Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is not out of step (step A474; N), a sorting process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

  Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). (Step A484). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 34 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process. In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51a) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. Here, 52 ms) is set (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 35 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process. In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A521), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A522).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 51b) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Here, 104 ms) is set (step A526), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602). ). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A603) in the special figure changing process described above. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (Step A613), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design) (2 in-flight signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614), and the control timer is initially set in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a, a stop flag related to the variable stop in the special figure 1 display 51a is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 51b, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 51b is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705). (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and the big hit (step A705). If A706; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in this embodiment, “16” or “2”) is acquired, and the RWM Is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the round number upper limit value is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with a lottery (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a lottery (a so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the ordinary map variation display game and the special map variation display game. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning mouth illegal prize number area of the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (Step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. In other words, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special gaming state generating means for generating a state is provided.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared (step A729), and the production command is set. Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A735), the production mode information check process regarding the production mode setting (step A735). A736) is performed, a remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched, and the production mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the production control device 300, thereby producing the production across modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the details of the high-probability fluctuation number update process (steps A726 and A735) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A751). If the special figure is not in high probability (step A751; N), the high probability variation frequency update process is terminated. If the special figure has a high probability (step A751; Y), the high probability change count is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the high probability change count is "0" (step A753). ).

If the high probability variation number is not “0” (step A753; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is “0” (step A753; Y), the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal related to high-probability end (for example, two jackpot signals are turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area.
Next, signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation is Save the time shortening state signal OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. In addition, there is a state of "high probability & short time" and a state of "high probability & short time", and even in the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and The normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is always OFF.

Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A759).
Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to turn it off, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode, is updated by -1 (step A772). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become “0” (step A773). If the effect remaining rotational speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the remaining rotation number of the effect becomes “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the remaining effect rotation speed in the RWM is acquired. Save to the area (step A677), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; Y), that is, when the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A782). An effect command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining speed is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A785), and an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If it is the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is terminated. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A791) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A792).

  Next, a signal related to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (output with big hit + small hit), and four big hits are ON (output with big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A797).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) 58 provided on the gaming board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The area is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure change that can be executed in a high probability state The high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of times of the display game is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to make it light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display mid-process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 43, in the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is set as the special game process. Save in the number area (step A812).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (large hit + small hit is output) )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and an illegal monitoring period non-period flag is saved in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). Then, an effect command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is acquired. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the large winning opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A907). A process for setting a transition to a process for opening a special prize opening (step A909) is performed, and the process during the fanfare / interval is terminated.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the long open big opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A908). Then, a process transition setting process (step A909) during the special winning opening is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, as the big hit pattern, (1) 2R, special winning opening release information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), (3) 16R, special prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), (4) 16R, special prize opening information 4 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open) , (5) 16R, special prize opening information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, special prize opening information 6 (1-8R is long open, 9-16R is short open), (7) 16R, Large winning opening information 7 (1 to 4R is long open and 5 to 16R is short open) is set.
Therefore, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big winning opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the process transition setting process (step A909) during the big prize opening opening in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In the process for setting the process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the process for opening a special prize opening (step A911), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A911). Step A912). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning mouth count area is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the special winning opening opening process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1003). It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). An interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the big winning opening is being opened. The process ends.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S1004). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is executed, and the big prize opening opening process is completed. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the end of the special gaming state is completed. An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the time of preparation (step A1009), performing an effect command setting process (step A1010), performing a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011), The process during opening of the big prize opening ends.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 47 shows the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) in the above-described special winning opening open process. In the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball process (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38, off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 38b is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the big prize opening remaining. The ball processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired. Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105). If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Move on to processing. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening information is a rank-down effect system value (step A1106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect in which a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues is executed, and that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. Specifically, as the big hit pattern, “16R, big prize opening information 2 (all open long)” and “16R, big prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open)” And “16R, big prize opening release information 4 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open)”, the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round A predetermined big hit round effect is displayed at, and the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round. If the selected jackpot pattern is “16R, big prize opening release information 2 (all long opening)”, the round continuation notification effect is notified and the round winning prize opening is long open in the fifth and subsequent rounds. If it is opened and the selected jackpot pattern is “16R, big prize opening release information 3 (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open)”, the round non-continuation is notified in the round continuous notification effect, In the rounds after the 5th round, the big prize opening is opened with a short opening.

When the big prize opening information is not a rank-down effect system value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the winning prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
When the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for rank-down effect is set (steps). A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the winning ball remaining ball process. Exit.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101). A1111), setting the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the winning prize opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, a big hit end process transition setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 49 shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A1121). A1122).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123), and the fanfare / interval The middle process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 50 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A1134), and the information on the round-number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), Information on the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the jackpot end process transition setting process ends.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the short-time operation data (step A1201; N), jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is the short-time operation data (step A1201; Y), jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). . Then, the production mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and an effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction” and “high probability / without time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state). , “High probability / short time / direction mode C” and “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process, but “low probability / no time / direction mode A”, “ There are “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode B” and “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), and an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed to determine whether or not a short-time state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216). .
When the short time state occurs after the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.
Further, when the time-short state does not occur after the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (Step A1218), the special figure normal process transition is performed. A setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 52 shows jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above jackpot end process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of the time-saving state (for example, 2 signals of the big hit) are saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of the high-probability state and the absence of the time-shortening state. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF. The status signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), a common low probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no short time flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1226), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227), in order to extinguish the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 57), the number of the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 Exit.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 53 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, the number with the short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1235). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A1256), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state (short-time state) over a predetermined period after the special game state ends. Then, in the specific gaming state, the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled so as to make it easier to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state, and more than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state. The variation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure fluctuation display game is configured to be shortened.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above jackpot end process. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the small hit fanfare mid-process, a small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hitting process transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hitting fanfare medium process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, “8” related to the small hit / medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, on-data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information of the big winning mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning mouth is cleared (step A1316), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting middle control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit middle process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the middle hit process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the small hit middle processing, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. The hit processing ends.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting action end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1405), and the loaded flag has a high special figure probability. It is determined whether it is a flag relating to (Step A1406). Thereby, it is determined whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In this case, it does not matter whether or not the time-short state is in effect.
If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process is terminated. When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. A small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting action transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small hitting process will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the small hitting action transition setting process, a branching process (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (the small hitting middle control pointer).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2”, or “4” in step A1411, the wait time (for example, 1500 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A1412). The off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.
If the control pointer is “1”, “3”, or “5” in step A1411, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the 200 msec opening and the 1500 msec closing are alternately performed, and the small hitting control pointer is sequentially set at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. Updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hitting control pointer is updated to “0”. At the end of the first 1500 msec closure (ie, when switching from the first 1500 msec closure to the second 200 msec release), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “1” and the second 200 msec release is released. The small hitting control pointer is updated to “2” at the end, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “3” at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the small hitting control at the end of the third 200 msec release. The pointer is updated to “4”, and the small hitting control pointer is updated to “5” at the end of the third 1500 msec closure. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec release, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the elapse of the 1900 msec small hitting remaining ball time and the subsequent 100 msec small hitting ending time, the small hitting The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth 200 msec opening, it is closed for 2000 msec, so the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere process transition setting process (step A1409) in the small hit medium process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process, first, “9” related to the small hit remaining ball process is set as the process number (step A1421), and the process number is set as the special figure game process number. Save in the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59A, in the small hit remaining sphere process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit end process transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the small hit end process transition setting process, first, “10” relating to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information on the winning prize count area is cleared (step A1515), the information on the small hitting middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 cleared) (step A1516), and the small hitting end process transition setting process is ended. .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability ( Step A1602).
When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N), an effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1610). An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), and an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616). If it is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. In the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A1618), the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure short time (short time state) (step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure short time (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621) In order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622). Processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing ends.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hit end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special figure normal process transition setting process, first, “0” relating to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1631), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, one signal for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information in the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information in the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status serial transmission buffer status is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is terminated.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 63 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the above-mentioned special-figure game process and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the regular game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

When the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the flashing control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the flashing control timer after the update is “0” (step A2105), and the flashing control timer after the update is “0”. If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  If the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variation symbol number of the control target is set. Is updated by +1 within the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A2106, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, in the fluctuation control table of the first special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer, and the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game) is defined. ) Is defined as a flashing control timer initial value corresponding to 104 ms, and a flash control timer initial value defined as a flashing control timer initial value is defined as a flashing control timer initial value. Has been. This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the fluctuation time in the collective display device 50.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is set to 0 (variable symbol number upper limit determination value-1). ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A2108 and A2111, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

  Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the first special diagram (first special diagram variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 during-change display that is repeatedly displayed during the change display of the first special figure change-display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern eight times. Further, 2 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the second special diagram (second special diagram variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated alternately between 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 during-change display that is repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation display of the second special figure fluctuation display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. In addition, 4 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the ordinary diagram (ordinary variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 3. Therefore, the display during normal map display repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the normal map change display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

  Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 64 shows the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the distribution process selects the latter half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation group table, or the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. For selecting the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

  In this distribution process, first, the first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483). Is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2201). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If the first data of the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distribution result is stored. The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is not an unsorted code (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) The first distribution value specified in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (step A2203).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random value prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484 (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3). Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter Process.

In other words, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then determined in the previous step A2205. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number) or first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) specified in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the latter half variation selection table, the latter half variation pattern (the latter half variation number), or the first half variation pattern (the first half variation number) is selected from among the (variation numbers).
If it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2207), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 65 shows the 2-byte sorting process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach” is defined. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

If the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), 2 bytes The distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is acquired. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random value prepared in step A473 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step A2304), and the calculated new random value is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A2305). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and thereafter Process.
That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305 to obtain a new value. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variation selection table defined in the selection table (the latter half variation group table).
If it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 64 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 65 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for the distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes. Therefore, the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Direction point control & probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control]
Next, “production point control” and “probability variation / non-probability variation symbol switching control” that are characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

The effect control device 300 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game (fluctuation display effect) on the display device 41. The decorative special figure variation display game in the present embodiment displays the identification symbol (decoration special symbol) composed of numbers in a left variation display region, a right variation display region, and a middle variation display region, and varies after a predetermined time. This is done by stopping the identification symbol being displayed and displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the three identification symbols that are stopped and displayed. For example, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result (for example, big hit), the display device 41 displays the probability variation pattern (that is, the probability variation display mode (in this embodiment, red)) as the result mode. The result mode in which the identification symbols) are aligned, or the result mode in which the non-probability variation symbols (that is, the identification symbols displayed in the non-probability variation display mode (blue in this embodiment)) are derived. When a result mode in which probability variation symbols are aligned is derived, a high probability state (probability variation state) occurs after the special gaming state ends.
In the drawings, for convenience, red is shown in black (filled) and blue is shown in white (outlined). Of course, the probability variation display mode is not limited to red, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the non-probability display mode is not limited to blue, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the initial setting, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), odd symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) of the identification symbols are probabilistic variation symbols. Of these, the even symbols (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”) are non-probable variables. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the even-numbered symbol is changed from the non-probability variable display mode to the probability-variable display mode by changing the even-numbered symbol display mode from the non-probable variation display mode.

The effect control device 300 is configured to add points when the point addition condition is satisfied between the first time point and the second time point.
In the present embodiment, the time when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the stop of the variation of the decoration special-figure display game is set as the second time, and the player's game start time (specifically, after reaching the second time) The first time point is the variation start point of the decorative special figure variation display game executed first.
In addition, the bonus for the number of points earned at the start of variation of the decoration special figure variation display game, when the pre-reading effect for the point addition target is performed, when the variation effect for the point addition target is performed, when the button operation for the point addition target is continued, When the target value is reached, it is determined that the point addition condition (point granting condition) is satisfied, and a predetermined point is added to the number of points.
Note that the point addition conditions (point grant conditions) are not limited to these. For example, when a game is played continuously for a predetermined time, or when a specific symbol stop mode (point addition symbol stop mode) such as “241” is stopped and displayed, a dedicated symbol indicating point addition (dedicated When the point addition symbol (point grant condition) is displayed, such as when a symbol that is normally stopped or a symbol with a number of points such as “+ 10P” added is displayed, A predetermined point may be added to the number of points.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the point-ahead target pre-reading effect is executed,
(1) When the result mode suggesting the transition to the pre-reading zone is stopped and displayed (for example, when three dedicated symbols are stopped and displayed, or one dedicated symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle fluctuation display area) ,
(2) When the result mode suggesting the start of the continuous notice effect is stopped and displayed (for example, a predetermined uncertain variable symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined variable display area (which may be an arbitrary variable display area). When a predetermined probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined variation display area (which may be an arbitrary variation display region), or “7” of the probability variation symbols is displayed in three variation display regions. When one or two of them are stopped)
(3) This is when a probability variation big hit hold (that is, a special chart start memory with a result of “probability big hit”) occurs.

In addition, when the variation effect (effect related to the special figure variation display game being executed) to be added is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c),
(1) When a predetermined reach (for example, SP0 reach, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, SP3 reach) production ends and the next production is started,
(2) When a specific reach production that occurred while staying in the look-ahead zone ends and the next production starts,
(3) When a predetermined character (for example, characters SU1, SU2, SU3) appears.

The point addition target button operation is continued, for example, as shown in FIG. 66C, when the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 is continued for a predetermined condition (for example, 4 seconds). When the touch operation on the rendering operation unit 550 continues for a predetermined condition establishment time, it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and then a predetermined point grant time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is obtained with the touch operation continued. 1 point is awarded every time.
Also, the time when the number of acquired points reaches the bonus target value is when the number of acquired points becomes a doublet as shown in FIG. 66 (d), for example.

The effect control device 300 changes the display mode of even symbols from the non-probable display mode to the probable display mode when the number of acquired points reaches the specified number. After that, when the second time point is reached, the display mode of the even-numbered symbols that have been switched to the probability variation symbol is returned from the probability variation display mode to the non-probability variation display mode (that is, the initial setting (see FIG. 66 (a)). And the number of acquired points is cleared.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the number of acquired points reaches “100”, the display form of the identification symbol “0” is changed from the non-probable change display form to the probable display form. When the number of points reaches “300”, the display mode of the identification symbol “6” is changed from the non-probable variation display mode to the probability variation display mode, and when the number of acquired points reaches “1000”, the identification symbol “2” The display mode is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode. That is, as the number of acquired points increases, the number (total number) of probability variation symbols increases and the number (total number) of non-probability variation symbols decreases.

In addition, the production control device 300 is configured to change the display mode of the even symbol from the non-probable change display mode to the probable display mode even when the probability change big hit hold occurs.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the probability variation big hit hold occurs and the game control device 100 is notified of the hold prefetch result, the display form of the identification symbol “4” is not displayed. The probability variation display mode is changed to the probability variation display mode.

  The display on the display device 41 when “probability change / non-accuracy change symbol switching control” is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 73 and 75. As shown in each figure, an undigested start memory display area R1 for displaying the current special figure start memory number is provided in the lower center of the display area of the display device 41, for example, and the display area of the display device 41 is displayed. For example, on the lower left side, an acquisition point number display area R2 that displays the current number of acquired points, and a decoration start memory corresponding to the start memory that triggered the execution of the change (the special figure change display game being executed) The variable start memory display area (digestion start memory display area) R3 for displaying the display is provided.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a display when the even-numbered symbol display mode is changed from the non-probability change display mode to the probability change display mode based on the fact that the number of acquired points has reached the specified number.
As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game starts, the points are added to the number of points. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), 1 point is added at the start of fluctuation. Note that the fluctuating identification symbol (decoration special symbol) may be displayed in a display mode in which it is possible to determine whether it is a probability variable symbol or a non-probable variable symbol, or may be displayed in a display mode that cannot be determined. May be.
Next, when the result of the change (the special figure change display game being executed) is “out of place”, as shown in FIG. Here, since the special figure starting storage number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, it is possible to set the identification symbol to be stopped and displayed at random.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), when the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started, the points are added to the number of points.
Next, when the result of the variation is “out of”, a result mode of out of derivation is derived as shown in FIG. Here, the special figure start memory number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, but the acquired point number is “99”, and the acquired point number becomes the specified number at the start of the fluctuation of the next special figure variable display game. Because it arrives, the non-probable variable symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, when the number of acquired points reaches a specified number, one of the non-probable symbols (the symbol to be changed) is selected based on the symbol changing condition and the changing symbol in FIG. 66 (b). The display mode is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode. And in order to make a player recognize that it switched from the non-probability change symbol to the probability change symbol, the change target symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in any of the left variation display region, the middle variation display region, and the right variation display region.

In the case of the present embodiment, since the change target symbol corresponding to the acquired point number “100” is “0” (see FIG. 66B), the acquired point number is defined at the start of the variation of the next special figure variation display game. When reaching “100” of the number, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), it may be a middle fluctuation display area (or a left fluctuation display area or a right fluctuation display area). And the identification symbol “0” may be forcibly stopped and displayed on any of the three variable display areas.
Also, since the symbol to be changed corresponding to the number of acquired points “300” is “6” (see FIG. 66 (b)), the number of acquired points is less than the specified number at the start of the variation of the next special figure variation display game. When reaching “300”, the identification symbol “6” is forcibly stopped and displayed.
In addition, since the symbol to be changed corresponding to the earned point number “1000” is “2” (see FIG. 66 (b)), the earned point number is less than the specified number at the start of the variation of the next special figure variation display game. When reaching “1000”, the identification symbol “2” is forcibly stopped and displayed.
Thereby, the player can be notified (recognized) of the change in the display mode of the identification symbol (even symbol).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), when the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game starts, the points are added to the number of points. Since the number of acquired points reaches the specified number by this addition and the symbol change condition is satisfied, as shown in FIGS. 67 (e) and 67 (f), the display mode of the change target symbol is changed from the non-probable display mode to the probabilistic display mode. It changes to the aspect. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 67 (e) and 67 (f), in the variable display area in which the change target symbol is stopped and displayed after the change target symbol is highlighted or the display mode of the change target symbol is changed. The player can be notified (recognized) of the change in the display mode more clearly by starting the variable display of the image or by performing white fade or the like during the change of the display mode of the symbol to be changed. It becomes possible.

68 and 69 are diagrams showing an example of a display when the display mode of the even number design switched to the probability variation symbol is returned from the probability variation display mode to the non-probability variation display mode.
As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game starts, the points are added to the number of points.
Next, when the result of the variation is “out of”, a result mode of out of derivation is derived as shown in FIG. Here, since the special figure starting storage number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, it is possible to set the identification symbol to be stopped and displayed at random.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), when the variable display of the decorative special map variable display game starts, the points are added to the number of points.
Next, when the result of the fluctuation is “out-of-range”, as shown in FIG. Here, since the special figure starting storage number is “1 (other than“ 0 ”)”, the identification symbol to be stopped and displayed can be set at random.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), when the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started, the points are added to the number of points.
Next, when the result of the variation is “out of”, a result mode of out of derivation is derived as shown in FIG. Here, since the special figure start memory number is “0” and no special figure start memory for generating the next special figure fluctuation display game is stored, the fluctuation is stopped. In the present embodiment, when the second time point (a time point when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the stop of the fluctuation) is reached, the display mode of the even symbol switched to the probability variable symbol is changed from the probability variable symbol to the non-probable variable symbol. Return to. Therefore, if the even-numbered symbols that have been switched to probability variation symbols are not stopped, the player will recognize that the display mode has changed to the non-probability variation display mode, that is, the probability variation symbol has switched to the non-probability variation symbol (returned). I can't let you. Therefore, the left variation display area is set with the even symbol having the highest probability that the display mode is changed from the non-probable display mode to the probability display mode, that is, the even symbol whose display mode is changed to the probable display mode first as the change target symbol. Then, it is forcibly stopped and displayed in either the middle fluctuation display area or the right fluctuation display area.

In the case of the present embodiment, since the even-numbered symbol whose display mode first changes to the probability change display mode is “0” (see FIG. 66B), as shown in FIG. The left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, or any two of the three fluctuation display areas). Stop display. Thereby, the player can be notified (recognized) of the change in the display mode of the identification symbol.
When the special figure start memory number is “0” (that is, when the fluctuation is stopped), the display mode first changes to the probability change display mode regardless of the presence or absence of an even number of symbols that are switched to the probability change symbol. By forcibly stopping and displaying even-numbered symbols to be performed, the processing burden can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), when the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game is stopped, a countdown display H1 for informing the remaining time until the second time point appears, and FIG. 69 (b) shows. As shown, as the remaining time until the second time point decreases, the acquired point number display region R2 gradually disappears.
If the next special figure variation display game is not started until the remaining time until the second time point becomes “0” (that is, until the second time point is reached), the game is shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 69 (d) and 69 (e), the acquired point number display area R2 disappears completely, and the display mode of the change target symbol returns from the probability variation display mode to the non-probability variation display mode. As shown in f), the system waits for a customer waiting demo setting. At that time, as shown in FIGS. 69 (d) and 69 (e), by changing the display mode by highlighting the change target pattern or performing white fade or the like while the display mode of the change target pattern is returned. It is possible to notify (recognize) the player more clearly.
On the display, the display mode of some of the even symbols that have been switched to the probability variation symbol has been changed from the probability variation display mode to the non-probability variation display mode, but internally, all of the even symbols that have been switched to the probability variation symbol. The display mode returns from the probability variation display mode to the non-probability variation display mode. That is, the state returns to the initial setting (see FIG. 66A).

In the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of even symbols from the non-probable display mode to the probabilistic display mode, the change target symbol is forcibly stopped or the special figure start memory number is “0”. At this time, the even-numbered pattern whose display mode is changed to the probability change display mode is forcibly stopped and displayed first, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when changing the display mode of the even symbol from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode, or when the special figure starting memory number is “0”, the identification symbol to be stopped may be set at random.
Further, the even number symbol that has been changed to the probability variation display mode due to the occurrence of the big hit may be returned to the non-probability variation display mode, and the number of acquired points may be cleared. Furthermore, when prefetching is performed during a big hit (during a predetermined round or during an ending), the number of even-numbered symbols to be returned from the probability variation display mode to the non-probability variation display mode is changed, and the prefetching result is changed. You may make it alert | report. For example, if there is no probability variation big hit hold in the start memory stored at the end of the big hit, the even number design changed to the probability change display mode is returned to the non-probable change display mode, and the start memory stored at the end of the big hit In the case where there is a probability variation big hit hold, the even symbols that have been changed to the probability variation display mode may not be returned to the non-probability variation display mode. In addition, when there is a probability variation jackpot hold in the start memory stored at the end of the jackpot, and the number of even symbols changing to the probability variation display mode is less than a predetermined number, You may make it change an even-numbered pattern to a probability change display mode.

70 to 72, on the basis of the occurrence of a probability variation jackpot hold (that is, a special figure start memory with a result of “probability variation big hit”), the display mode of the even symbol is changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability variation display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of making it do.
In the present embodiment, when the probability variation big hit hold occurs, the display mode of the identification symbol “4” is changed from the non-probability variation display mode to the probability variation display mode (see FIG. 66B).

FIG. 70 shows a pattern for changing the even symbol display form from the non-probable change display form to the probability change display form at the start of the special figure change display game based on the probability change big hit hold.
As shown in FIG. 70 (a), when the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started, the points are added to the number of points. Further, when a probability change big hit hold occurs and the game control device 100 is notified of the hold prefetch result, the prefetch decoration special figure start memory display H2 corresponding to the hold (probability big hit hold) is displayed in the undigested start memory display area. Displayed on R1. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading special figure start memory display H2 is displayed in a display mode (for example, different color, presence / absence of rocking display) different from the display mode of the other special special figure start memory display. Has been.

Next, when the result of the variation is “out of”, a result mode of out of derivation is derived as shown in FIG. Here, since the special figure starting storage number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, it is possible to set the identification symbol to be stopped and displayed at random.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), when the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started, the points are added to the number of points. The prefetch effect may be stepped up every time the special figure start memory is consumed (that is, every time the display position of the prefetch decoration special figure start memory display H2 is shifted).

Next, when the result of the variation is “out-of-range”, as shown in FIG. Here, the special figure start memory number is “1 (other than“ 0 ”)”, but since the next special figure variation display game is a game based on the probability variation big hit hold, the non-probability variation symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. .
In this pattern, at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the probability variation big hit hold, the display mode of the identification symbol “4” changes from the non-probability variation display mode to the probability variation display mode. Also, at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the probability variation big hit hold, a predetermined point is added (see FIG. 66 (c)), and the number of acquired points reaches “1000”. The display mode of the non-probable variation pattern (that is, the symbol that is not switched to the probability variation symbol among the identification symbols “0”, “6”, and “2”) changes from the non-probability variation display mode to the certain variation display mode. Therefore, it is possible to notify (recognize) the player of the change in the display mode of the identification symbol by forcibly stopping and displaying the non-probable variation symbol as the symbol to be changed.

When there are four change target symbols (that is, when there is no even symbol switched to the probability variation symbol), it is possible to randomly set an identification symbol to be stopped and displayed from the four change target symbols.
When there are three change target symbols, for example, different change target symbols are forcibly stopped and displayed in each of the three variable display areas.
When there are two change target symbols, for example, one change target symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in any two of the three variable display regions, and the other change target is displayed in the remaining variable display regions. The symbol is forcibly stopped.
In addition, when there is one change target symbol, that is, when the non-probable variation symbol is only “4”, for example, the identification symbol “4” is forcibly stopped in one or two of the three variable display areas. The probability variation symbol (that is, the identification symbol other than “4”) is stopped and displayed in the remaining variation display area.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 70 (e) and 70 (f), the number of acquired points reaches “1000”, and the display mode of the change target symbol changes from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode. At that time, as shown in FIGS. 70 (e) and 70 (f), in the variable display area in which the change target symbol is stopped after the change target symbol is highlighted or the display mode of the change target symbol is changed. The player can be notified (recognized) of the change in the display mode more clearly by starting the variable display of the image or by performing white fade or the like during the change of the display mode of the symbol to be changed. It becomes possible.

Note that point addition may be performed after the display mode is changed so that the number of acquired points reaches “1000”.
Further, when the acquired point number reaches “1000”, the display mode of the acquired point number in the acquired point number display area R2 may be changed to a specific display mode.
In addition, at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the probability variation big hit hold, 1000 points etc. were added to reach all the identification symbols to be the probability variation symbol, and the number of earned points reached “1000”, but it is limited to this. However, the number of acquired points does not have to reach “1000” at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the probability variation big hit hold. In this case, at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the probability variation big hit hold, even if the identification symbols “0”, “6”, “2” have non-probable variation symbols, only the display mode of the identification symbol “4” is displayed. Is changed from the non-probability change display mode to the probability change display mode.
In addition, as shown in the patterns of FIG. 71 and FIG. 72 described later, point addition is performed step by step so that the number of acquired points reaches “1000”, and the number (total number) of probability variation symbols is increased step by step. Also good.

In FIGS. 71 and 72, the display mode of even symbols is sequentially changed from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode from the occurrence of the probability change jackpot hold to the start of the special figure variation display game based on the probability change jackpot hold. Indicates a pattern.
As shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the variable display of the decorative special map variable display game starts, points are added to the number of points. Further, when a probability change big hit hold occurs and the game control device 100 is notified of the hold prefetch result, the prefetch decoration special figure start memory display H2 corresponding to the hold (probability big hit hold) is displayed in the undigested start memory display area. Displayed on R1.

Next, when the result of the variation is “out of”, the result mode of out of derivation is derived as shown in FIG. Here, the special figure starting memory number is “3 (other than“ 0 ”)”, but since the probability variation big hit hold has occurred, the non-probability variation symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. Since the current number of acquired points is “72” and there is no even-numbered symbol that has been switched to the probable variation symbol, the even-numbered symbol whose display mode changes to the probabilistic variation mode first is forcibly stopped and displayed as the symbol to be changed.
Next, “0”, which is an even-numbered pattern whose display mode changes to the probability change display mode first, changes from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode when the number of acquired points reaches “100” ( 66 (b)), a point addition display effect is performed in order to reach the number of acquired points to “100”. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 71C, as the point addition display effect, a display effect in which the pre-reading decoration special figure start storage display H2 affects the point addition is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), when the variation display of the decoration special diagram variation display game starts, the points are added and the number of acquired points reaches “100”, and the display mode of the change target symbol “0” is displayed. However, it changes from a non-probable change display mode to a probability change display mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (e), the variable display is started also in the variable display area in which the change target symbol is stopped and displayed (in this example, the medium variable display area).

Next, when the result of the variation is “out of”, a result mode of out of derivation is derived as shown in FIG. Here, although the special figure starting memory number is “2 (other than“ 0 ”)”, since the probability variation big hit hold has occurred, the non-probability variation symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. Since the current number of earned points is “100” and the even symbol that has been switched to the probability variation symbol is only “0”, the second variation is “6”, which is the even symbol whose display mode changes to the probability variation display mode. Force stop display as the target symbol.
Next, “6”, which is an even-numbered pattern whose display mode changes to the probability change display mode second, changes from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode when the number of acquired points reaches “300”. (See FIG. 66 (b)), as shown in FIG. 72 (a), a point addition display effect is performed in order to reach the number of acquired points to “300”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the variation display of the decoration special diagram variation display game starts, the points are added and the number of acquired points reaches “300”, and the display mode of the change target symbol “6” is displayed. However, it changes from a non-probable change display mode to a probability change display mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the variable display is started also in the variable display area in which the change target symbol is stopped and displayed (in this example, the medium variable display area).

Next, when the result of the variation is “out of”, a result mode of out of derivation is derived as shown in FIG. Here, the special figure starting memory number is “1 (other than“ 0 ”)”, but since the next special figure variation display game is a game based on the probability variation big hit hold, all the even symbols that have not switched to the probability variation symbol are displayed. Is forcibly stopped and displayed as a symbol to be changed.
Next, “2”, which is an even-numbered pattern whose display mode changes to the probability change display mode third, will change from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode when the number of acquired points reaches “1000”. (See FIG. 66 (b)), as shown in FIG. 72 (e), a point addition display effect is performed in order to reach the number of acquired points to “1000”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (f), when the variation display of the decoration special diagram variation display game starts, the points are added and the number of acquired points reaches “1000”, and the display mode of the symbol to be changed is non-displayed. The probability variation display mode changes to the probability variation display mode. After that, the probability variation big hit variation is started.

In the case of the patterns shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the start timing of the display mode change effect may be set according to the number of uncertain variations. Specifically, for example, when the third special figure hold is a probable big hit hold and the number of acquired points is “300” or more (that is, the identification symbols “0” and “6” are displayed in the display mode) Is changed to the probability change display mode, while the identification symbols “2” and “4” are not changed to the probability change display mode), two special figure holds are digested and the probability change is changed. When the jackpot hold becomes the first special figure hold, the display mode change effect is started, and when the fluctuation of the special figure change display game based on the hold immediately before the probability change big hit hold starts, the identification symbol “2” The display mode is changed from the non-probability change display mode to the probability change display mode, and the display mode of the identification symbol “4” at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game (that is, the special figure fluctuation display game based on the probability change big hit hold) Changed from non-probable display mode to probabilistic display mode It may be allowed to.
Also, whether to display the pattern shown in FIG. 70 or the pattern shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 may be selected randomly or based on a predetermined rule.

FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display when points are added based on a touch operation on the effect operation unit 550.
FIG. 74 is a timing chart for explaining an example of point addition based on a touch operation on the effect operation unit 550.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), when the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game starts, the points are added to the number of points, and the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 becomes valid. Here, in this embodiment, the period from the start to the end of the variable display is the touch operation effective period. Further, when the point addition target production starts before the end of the variable display, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the point addition target effect is set as the touch operation effective period.
Next, when the result of the variation is “out of”, a result mode of out of derivation is derived as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 74A, the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 is invalid while the result mode is derived (that is, the symbol stop period).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (a), when the variation display of the decoration special diagram variation display game starts, the points are added to the number of points, and the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 becomes valid. . In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), since the reach effect of the change effect to be added is generated before the end of the change display of the decoration special view change display game, the touch operation is performed until the reach effect is started. Becomes effective.
Then, if the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 continues for a predetermined condition establishment time (for example, 4 seconds) during the touch operation effective period, it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and then the predetermined operation is performed while the touch operation is continued. One point is awarded each time a point grant time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 73 (d) and 74 (a), when the reach production starts, the touch operation on the production operation unit 550 becomes invalid, and the total of points given during the touch operation valid period is the point. Added to the number. Therefore, even if the touch operation continues after the start of the reach effect, only the sum of points given until the start of the reach effect is added.
Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), when the reach effect ends, points corresponding to the type of reach effect are added to the number of points. In the example shown in FIG. 73 (a), since the SP2 reach effect has ended, 10 points (see FIG. 66 (c)) are added as points corresponding to the SP2 reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74B, even if a touch operation is performed on the effect operation unit 550 during the touch operation effective period, the duration time of the touch operation reaches a predetermined condition establishment time (for example, 4 seconds). If the touch operation valid period ends before the point operation is performed, it is determined that the point addition condition is not satisfied, and point addition based on the touch operation is not performed.
The production operation unit 550 can perform both a contact operation (touch operation) and a press operation (push operation). However, the production operation unit 550 can effectively perform the push operation even during the valid period of the touch operation. It is configured to be possible.

75 (a) to 75 (c) are diagrams showing examples of display when points are added based on the fact that the number of acquired points has become doublet.
In this example, since the display of fluctuation is started and 1 point is added, the number of acquired points has become “111”, which is a doublet, and therefore, 10 points as points corresponding to “111” (FIG. 66C) Is added to the number of points.

Note that the production control device 300 can also control the content of the production in order to make the number of acquired points small.
Specifically, for example, when the special figure variation display game is started and the number of acquired points becomes “Zoro eyes-1” by the point addition based on the variation start, the game control device related to the special figure variation display game Even if the command from 100 is a reach occurrence, it is based on the start of fluctuation in the next special figure fluctuation display game without adding by the reach effect by replacing it with a normal fluctuation effect pattern (effect pattern without reach). You may make it look at the number of acquisition points by point addition.
On the other hand, for example, when the number of acquired points becomes a round by point addition based on the pre-reading effect or point addition based on the variation effect, the corresponding effect is executed regardless of the command from the game control device 100. The number of acquired points may be rounded by adding points based on the performance.

75 (d) to 75 (f) are diagrams showing examples of display when points are added based on the appearance of a predetermined character.
In this example, after a variable display is started and 1 point is added, a step-up notice effect (that is, an effect that sequentially executes a notice effect set in a plurality of stages from a lower stage to a predetermined stage) occurs. Of the characters that appear during the step-up notice effect, the character SU1 appears at each stage. Therefore, at each stage, 5 points (see FIG. 66C) are added to the number of points as points corresponding to the character SU1.

  In addition, when a plurality of points (two or more points) are added and “acquired point number <specified number” becomes “acquired point number> specified number”, specifically, for example, the acquired point number is “97”. When the point addition based on SP2 reach (addition of 10 points) is performed and the number of acquired points reaches “107”, the character or the like indicates that the acquired number of points has reached the specified number after the addition. You may make it change a display mode to a probability change display mode in the following special figure fluctuation display game, notifying.

  In addition, the number of acquired points may be stored as a player's game history by a linked service with a mobile phone, and the next game may be started from the stored number of acquired points. In this case, when the stored number of acquired points is “100” or more, the next game can be started from a state in which the ratio of probability variation symbols is high.

In addition, when a display mode switching password is disclosed on a gaming machine manufacturer's website or the like and the password is input to the gaming machine 10, what is set as a default as a probability variation display mode or a non-probability variation display mode? Different modes may be set.
In this case, if the password that can be used is changed for each predetermined period and configured to change the display mode according to each period (for example, snow pattern in winter and cherry pattern in spring), It is possible to play a game.
Further, in this case, if the passwords that can be used are different for each amusement store and are changed to display modes unique to each amusement store, it becomes possible to appeal each amusement store.

According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “production point control” and the “probability / non-probability change symbol switching control” described above, a game value is given to the player when the game result is a predetermined special result. In a possible gaming machine, an effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the effect, and a point giving means (point adding condition) that can give a player points based on the establishment of a predetermined point giving condition (point addition condition) in the game The effect control device can change the effect mode of the effect based on the fact that the points given by the point giving means reach a specified number.
Therefore, since the presentation mode is changed by accumulating points, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the points have reached the specified number, the effect mode of the change display effect (decoration special figure change display game) on the display device 41 is changed (specifically, the display of even symbols) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the character displayed on the display device 41 based on the point reaching the specified number is not limited to this. Change the effect mode (light emission mode) of the lamp (light emitting means) arranged on the frame (front frame 12 or glass frame 15) or game board 30, or change the frame (front frame 12 or glass frame 15). It is also possible to change the display mode of the display effect other than the variable display effect, such as changing the sound output mode from the speakers (speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) arranged in the above. It is also possible to change the effect mode of the effect in the effect device (including the decoration device) other than the display device 41.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “production point control” and the “probability change / non-accuracy change symbol switching control” described above, the special results include a probability change result and a non-probability change result. When the result is a probable change result, the apparatus includes a probabilistic state generating means (game control device 100) for generating a probabilistic state in which the probability that the result of the game is a special result is higher than the normal probability state. The control device 300) can display a variable display effect (decorative special-figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification symbols in a variable manner corresponding to the game on the display device 41, and the game result is a probable change result. In addition, when the result mode constituted by the probability variation display pattern (probability variation symbol) of the identification symbols can be stopped and displayed on the display device 41 and the game result becomes a non-probability variation result, Uncertain change display state As a result, it is possible to stop display on the display device 41 of the result mode composed of the symbols (non-probability variation symbols), and the probability variation is based on the point imparted by the point imparting means (production control device 300) reaching the specified number. It is also possible to change the ratio between the total number of symbols (probability variation symbol) of the display mode and the total number of symbols (non-probability variation symbol) of the non-probability variation display mode.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of the total number of probabilistic symbols and the total number of non-probable symbols changes by accumulating points, so that the player can feel that the degree of expectation has changed, and the game Can enhance the interest of
In the present embodiment, each time the point reaches the specified number, the total number of probability variation symbols is increased and the total number of non-probability variation symbols is decreased. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each time the number reaches the specified number, the total number of probability variation symbols may be decreased and the total number of non-probability variation symbols may be increased.
In the present embodiment, the specified number is a positive value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number may be a negative value. In this case, every time the point reaches the specified number of positive values, the total number of probability variation symbols is increased and the total number of non-probability variation symbols is decreased, and every time the point reaches the specified number of negative values, the probability variation is increased. It is possible to reduce the total number of symbols and increase the total number of non-probable variations. The condition for subtracting points is that no button operation (such as a touch operation on the effect operation unit 550) is performed when a button effect (an effect in which the player's button operation is intervened) occurs, and the launch operation is stopped during a specific reach. There may be a case where the player does not actively participate in the game, such as (so-called “stopping”).

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “effect point control” and the “probability / non-probability change symbol switching control” described above, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can display the non-probability change display pattern (non-probability change mode). The ratio of the total number of symbols (probability variation symbols) in the probability variation display mode and the total number of symbols (non-probability variation symbols) in the non-probability variation display mode is changed by changing the display mode of probability variation symbols) to the probability variation display mode. It is also possible to configure.
By constructing in this way, the ratio of probability variation symbols increases by accumulating points, so that it is possible to give the player an impression that the degree of expectation is improved, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, since the player continues the game in an attempt to save points, the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved.

Note that the method of changing the ratio between the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol is not limited to the method of changing the display mode, and can be changed as appropriate.
For example, a method of replacing any one of the non-probability changing symbols with any one of the probability changing symbols without changing the display mode may be used. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the odd symbol is a probability variable symbol and the even symbol is a non-probable symbol, any one of the non-probable symbols (for example, the even symbol) “0”) may be replaced with any one of the probability variation symbols (for example, the odd symbol “1”), and the probability variation symbol “1” may be displayed instead of the non-probability variation symbol “0”. . In this case, the type of probability variable symbols that can be displayed does not change (in reality, the number of probability variable symbols increases), and the number of non-variable symbols that can be displayed decreases. Be changed.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “effect point control” and the “probability / non-probability change symbol switching control” described above, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can display the non-probability change display pattern (non-probability change mode). When the display mode of (probable change symbol) is changed to the probability change display mode, the result mode including the symbol (change target symbol) that is the target of the change is stopped and displayed on the display device 41, and the symbol that is being stopped (change target symbol) It is also possible to change the display mode from the non-probability display mode to the probability change display mode.
By comprising in this way, the change of the display mode of an identification symbol can be alert | reported to a player (it can be made to recognize).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “production point control” and the “probability / non-probability change symbol switching control” described above, a predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening, A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a predetermined random number as a start storage up to a predetermined upper limit number is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) has no start memory stored in the start storage means In addition, the production mode of the production is returned to the production mode before the change, and the point granting unit (production control device 300) is configured to clear the given point when the startup memory is not stored in the startup storage unit. It is also possible.
That is, when the suspension is interrupted, the display mode of the even numbered symbols that have been switched to the probability variation symbol returns from the probability variation display mode to the non-probability variation display mode, and the ratio of the probability variation symbol that has increased is restored. Therefore, the player continues to fire the game ball so as not to interrupt the hold, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved.

  In addition, when the probability variation big hit hold occurs and the display mode of all identification symbols is changed to the probability variation display mode, that is, when all the identification symbols become the probability variation symbol, there is no non-probability variation symbol, so the game result is In the case of a non-probability change result, the result mode composed of non-probability change symbols cannot be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this case, the display mode of the even symbol that is switched to the probability variation symbol at a predetermined timing from the start to the end of the special gaming state even if the second time point is not reached exceptionally To the non-probable change display mode, and the number of acquired points can be cleared.

Further, the “production point control” and the “probability / non-probability change symbol switching control” can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 10 but also to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.
In addition, the “production point control” function additional password is disclosed on the gaming machine manufacturer's website, etc., and when the password is input to the gaming machine, “production point control” can be performed. May be.
In addition, when the password for the “probability / non-probability changing symbol switching control” function is disclosed on the gaming machine manufacturer's website, and the password is input to the gaming machine, “probability / non-probability changing symbol switching control” is performed. May be configured to be possible.

In the present embodiment, the blue identification symbol is a non-probable variation symbol (non-probability variation definite symbol), and when the blue identification symbol is stopped and displayed, the probability variation state does not occur after the special gaming state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a blue identification symbol may be used as a chance symbol, and even if the blue identification symbol is stopped and displayed, a probability variation state may occur after the special gaming state ends.
In other words, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing “production point control” and “probability / non-probability changing symbol switching control” has a probability variation state in which a probability that a game result is a special result is higher than a normal probability state. A generation means (game control device 100) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a variable display effect (decorative special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification symbols in a variable manner corresponding to the game. 41, and the identification symbol is generated in the first display mode (for example, red) that clearly notifies that the probability variation state is generated by the probability variation state generation unit, and the probability variation state is generated by the probability variation state generation unit. And a second display form (for example, blue) that informs vaguely that the point is given, and the points given by the point giving means (production control device 300) reach the specified number. Based on, it can be configured to change the ratio of the total number of symbols in the total number of symbols in the first display form the second display mode.
By constructing in this manner, the ratio of the total number of symbols in the first display mode and the total number of symbols in the second display mode changes by accumulating points, so the impression that the degree of expectation changes to the player Can increase the interest of the game.

[Stage change control]
Next, “stage change control” that is characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 76 shows an example of an effect stage that can be stayed in the normal gaming state.
FIG. 77 shows an example of the BGM output at each effect stage and an example of the effect executed at each effect stage.
FIG. 78 shows an example of the switching order of each effect stage.

In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, “normal stage 1A” shown in FIG. 76 (a), “normal stage 1B” shown in FIG. 76 (b), and “normal stage 1B” shown in FIG. 76 (c). It is possible to stay in any one stage of “normal stage 2A”, “normal stage 2B” shown in FIG. 76 (d), and “special stage” shown in FIG. 76 (e).
Each BGM output at each stage is composed of “Intro-A Melo-Sabi-Outro”. In the example shown in FIG. 77 (a), the BGM time value (that is, the length of one BGM song) is the same in the stage other than the “special stage”, but the BGM time value is different. May be. The time value of BGM output in one effect stage and the time value of the effect image displayed in the one effect stage are set to be substantially the same.

  When the stage control lottery is won, the production control device 300 “from the end of the chorus part to the end of the BGM (that is, from the end of the chorus part to the end of the outro part) (hereinafter“ after the chorus part ends ”). It is configured to perform stage changes (switching of the production stage). If the stage is changed before or during the rust portion, the player cannot hear the rust portion. In particular, a player who is looking forward to the BGM (music) that flows during the game is less interested in the game, whereas the stage change is “after the climax part” as in this embodiment. By doing so, it is possible to make the player listen at least to the rust portion, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202938, the stage switching is executed based on the result of the variable display game (prefetch result, etc.), for example, BGM output in the stage during stay No consideration is given to (music).
For example, when a BGM (music) unique to each stage is set, if the stage switching is executed based on the result of the variable display game, the BGM (music) being output is interrupted, and the stage switching is performed. Occasionally, BGM (musical piece) was blown away, making the player feel uncomfortable.
In particular, for players who are interested in the type of game machine and the content of the production (especially copyrighted material), the model-specific BGM (music) is very important and I want to listen to it as much as possible. There are requests such as wanting to listen to the best part of the sound.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, a player who is interested in a model-specific BGM (music) and playing a game has not been taken into consideration until now, “to fully enjoy BGM (music)”. The production was performed with emphasis (mainly, the production stage was switched).

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), in each stage, notice stage-specific notice effects (main notice, sub notice, dance notice, etc.) can appear, and common notice effects can also appear. Yes.
When the notice stage-specific notice effect is being executed, it is not necessary to change the stage even when the stage change is possible (in this embodiment, “any time after the end of the chorus part”). If it is possible to switch the notice stage effect specific to the stage stage being executed to the common notice stage effect, the stage change may be performed by switching. However, if the number of acquired points changes due to switching to the common notice effect, priority is given to the notice effect that is not changed or the number of obtained points increases.

Further, it may be determined whether or not to change the stage according to the number of acquired points, appearance frequency, or the like with reference to the contents of the notice effect that has been determined to be executed in advance.
In addition, for example, when the SP reach production includes an SP reach production specific to the production stage and a common SP reach production, and the stage change is performed before SP reach development, the development destination is referred to and a predetermined condition is satisfied. If it is developed into SP reach (for example, SP reach production with a high number of acquired points or SP reach production specific to the production stage), it may be developed into SP reach without performing the stage change.

The production control device 300 is configured to perform a stage change lottery every time the variation display of the special figure variation display game is started, and to shift to the next normal stage when the lottery is won. In addition, when the stage change lottery is not won before the automatic switching condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition is satisfied.
Here, in this embodiment, a condition (hereinafter referred to as “condition A”) that the number of times of repeating the BGM has reached a preset number of loops (see FIG. 77A) and the number of fluctuations. The automatic switching condition is the time when either one of the conditions that the (number of executions of the special figure variation display game) has reached a preset number of times (hereinafter referred to as “condition B”) is satisfied. The time when it is established. Note that it may be determined that the automatic switching condition is satisfied only when the condition A is satisfied without considering the condition B, or the automatic switching is performed only when the condition B is satisfied without considering the condition A. It may be determined that the condition is satisfied. Of course, other conditions may be used as the automatic switching condition.

Specifically, “Process A” is first performed. In “Processing A”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, in “Normal Stage 1A (Umiumi Stage)”, stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change, and special stage change is performed. When the lottery is won, the stage shifts to “special stage (flame stage)”, and when the normal stage change lottery is won, the stage shifts to “normal stage 1B (cloud stage)” which is the next normal stage. . On the other hand, in the “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)”, the stage change lottery is won until the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A (in this embodiment, one song × 3 times or 30 fluctuations) is satisfied. If not, when the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A is satisfied, the process proceeds to the “normal stage 1B (cloud cloud stage)” that is the next normal stage.
In addition, when a transition is made from “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)” to “special stage (flame stage)”, in “special stage (flame stage)”, an automatic switching condition for the special stage (of this embodiment) In this case, when “one song × 2 times or 20 fluctuations” is established, the process proceeds to the “normal stage 1B (cloud cloud stage)” which is the next normal stage.

Next, “Process B” is performed. In “Process B”, as shown in FIG. 78, for example, in “normal stage 1B (cloud cloud stage)”, stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of every change, and special stage change is performed. If you win the lottery, you will move to “special stage (flame stage)”. If you win the normal stage change lottery, you will move to the next normal stage, “normal stage 2A (Yamayama stage)”. . On the other hand, in the “normal stage 1B (cloud stage)”, the stage change lottery is not won until the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1B (in this embodiment, one song × 3 times or 30 fluctuations) is satisfied. If the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1B is satisfied, the process proceeds to the “normal stage 2A (mountain mountain stage)” that is the next normal stage.
In addition, when “normal stage 1B (cloud stage)” is shifted to “special stage (flame stage)”, “normal stage 2A” is the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied. (Yamayama stage) ”.

Next, “Process C” is performed. In “Process C”, as shown in FIG. 78, for example, in “Normal Stage 2A (Yamayama Stage)”, a stage change lottery (a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change, and a special stage change is performed. If you win the lottery, you will move to “special stage (flame stage)”; if you win the normal stage change lottery, you will move to the next normal stage, “normal stage 1A (Umi Umi stage)” . On the other hand, in the “normal stage 2A (mountain mountain stage)”, the stage change lottery is not won until the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 2A (in this embodiment, one song × 2 times or 30 fluctuations) is satisfied. If the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 2A is satisfied, the process proceeds to the “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)” which is the next normal stage.
When the “normal stage 2A (mountain stage)” is shifted to the “special stage (flame stage)”, the “normal stage 1A” is the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied. (Umi Umi Stage) ”.

Next, “Process D” is performed. In “Process D”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, in “Normal Stage 1A (Umiumi Stage)”, a stage change lottery (a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change, and a special stage change is performed. When the lottery is won, the stage shifts to “special stage (flame stage)”, and when the normal stage change lottery is won, the stage shifts to “normal stage 1B (cloud stage)” which is the next normal stage. . On the other hand, in the “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)”, if the stage change lottery is not won before the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A is satisfied, the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A is satisfied. At that time, the process shifts to “normal stage 1B (cloud cloud stage)” which is the next normal stage.
In addition, when the “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)” shifts to the “special stage (flame stage)”, the “normal stage 1B” is the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied. (Cloud stage)

Next, “Process E” is performed. In “Process E”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, a stage change lottery (a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of each change in “normal stage 1B (cloud cloud stage)”, and a special stage change is performed. If you win the lottery, you will move to “special stage (flame stage)”. If you win the normal stage change lottery, you will move to the next normal stage, “normal stage 2A (Yamayama stage)”. . On the other hand, in the “normal stage 1B (cloud stage)”, if the stage change lottery is not won before the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1B is satisfied, the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1B is satisfied. At that time, the process proceeds to the “normal stage 2B (peach peach stage)” which is the next normal stage.
Further, when the “normal stage 1B (cloud stage)” shifts to the “special stage (flame stage)”, the “normal stage 2B” is the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied. (Momo Momo Stage) ".

Next, “Process F” is performed. In “Process F”, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, a stage change lottery (a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery) is performed at the start of every change in the “normal stage 2B (peach peach stage)”, and a special stage If you win the change lottery, move to "special stage (flame stage)", if you win the normal stage change lottery, move to the next normal stage, "normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)" To do. On the other hand, in the “normal stage 2B (peach peach stage)”, the stage change lottery is won until the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 2B (in this embodiment, one song × 2 times or 30 fluctuations) is satisfied. If not, when the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 2B is satisfied, the process proceeds to the “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)”, which is the next normal stage, and returns to “processing A”.
In addition, when “normal stage 2B (peach peach stage)” is shifted to “special stage (flame stage)”, “normal stage” is the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied. The process proceeds to “1A (Umiumi Stage)” and returns to “Process A”.

That is, “Process A: Normal Stage 1A (→ Special Stage)” → “Process B: Normal Stage 1B (→ Special Stage)” → “Process C: Normal Stage 2A (→ Special Stage)” → “Process D: Normal Stage” 1A (→ Special stage) ”→“ Process E: Normal stage 1B (→ Special stage) ”→“ Process F: Normal stage 2B (→ Special stage) ”→“ Process A: Normal stage 1A (→ Special stage) ”→ The stage is switched in the following order.
In addition, when the SP reach is developed while staying at one stage, the SP reach stage is inserted and flows (outputted) from the gaming machine even at a timing other than the stage changeable timing. The BGM switches from the BGM corresponding to the one stage to the BGM corresponding to the SP reach. When the result of the SP reach is deviated, the result mode of the deregulation is stopped and displayed, and then the process proceeds to the normal stage next to the one effect stage.

FIG. 79 shows a timing chart for explaining an example of “stage change control” in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 79, every time the variation display of the special map variation display game starts, a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery are performed as the stage change lottery.
If the stage change lottery is won at a timing other than the stage change possible timing, the stage change is waited until the stage change possible timing is reached. In the example shown in FIG. 79, since the special stage change lottery was won in the middle of the intro part, that is, the special stage change lottery was won before the end of the chorus part, the timing until the latest stage change possible timing (ie, the chorus part ends) Until the stage change is over, the stage shifts to the “special stage (flame stage)”.

In the “special stage (flame stage)”, the stage change lottery is not performed, and when the automatic switching condition for the special stage is satisfied, the process proceeds to the next normal stage.
As the stage change lottery, two lotteries, a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery, are performed. When both lotteries are won at the same time, one lottery result is prioritized.

Note that the probability of winning a normal stage change and the probability of winning a special stage change may be the same or different, but the probability of winning a special stage change is higher than the probability of winning a normal stage change. Lowering the probability of winning can give a special feeling to the transition to the special stage.
It is also possible to configure to shift to a special stage based on the prefetch result. With this configuration, the player can have a sense of expectation for the special stage.
In the present embodiment, the stage change lottery is configured to perform two lotteries, a normal stage change lottery and a special stage change lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One lottery including both the result of winning the change as the lottery result may be performed.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, a special stage change lottery (winning probability: 1/200, for example) is performed at the start of every change, and the special stage change lottery is not won until the automatic switching condition is satisfied. In such a case, a normal stage change lottery (winning probability: for example 1/2) is performed when the automatic switching condition is satisfied, and if the normal stage change lottery is won, the process proceeds to the next normal stage, and the normal stage If the stage change lottery is not won, it can be configured not to move to the next normal stage.

Specifically, first, a special stage change lottery is performed every time the change display of the special figure change display game is started in the “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)”.
As shown in FIG. 80, if the special stage change lottery is not won before the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A (for example, one song × 3 times) is satisfied, the automatic for the normal stage 1A When the switching condition is satisfied, a normal stage change lottery is performed, and when the normal stage change lottery is won, the process proceeds to the next normal stage (for example, cloud cloud stage). On the other hand, if the normal stage change lottery is not won, the process proceeds to the “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)” without moving to the next normal stage, and the same process is repeated.

On the other hand, if the special stage change lottery is won before the automatic switching condition for the normal stage 1A is established, the process proceeds to the special stage.
In the example shown in FIG. 82, since the special stage change lottery was won in the middle of the intro part, that is, the special stage change lottery was won before the end of the chorus part, the timing until the latest stage change possible timing (ie, the chorus part ends) Until the stage change is over, the stage shifts to the “special stage (flame stage)”.
In the example shown in FIG. 81, since the special stage change lottery was won in the middle of the outro part, that is, the special stage change lottery was won after the chorus part was finished, the “special stage (flame stage)” without waiting for the stage change. It has moved to.

  In FIGS. 79 and 82, the stage change lottery is won in the middle of the second intro part in the “normal stage 1A (Umiumi stage)”, and the stage change is waited until the second chorus part ends. In this case, when the stage change lottery is won, the first chorus part (the first chorus part) is completed, so it is not necessary to wait for the stage change until the second chorus part is finished. That is, if at least the first rust portion has been completed, the stage change may be performed without waiting.

It should be noted that in one normal stage, it is possible to increase the probability of winning a stage change each time the BGM repeat count increases.
It is also possible to vary the probability of winning the stage change according to the prefetching result. Specifically, for example, when a special figure start memory that results in a “big hit” is stored, the probability of winning a stage change can be configured to be higher than in other cases. It is.
Further, the stage change lottery may be performed only when the stage change is possible (in the case of this embodiment, “after the end of the rust portion”).

According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “stage change control” described above, in the gaming machine that can give a player a gaming value when the game result is a predetermined special result, a plurality of performance stages The stage is provided with stage stage control means (stage control device 300) capable of setting a stage stage selected from among them and outputting music (BGM) corresponding to the stage stage selected from the speakers 19a, 19b. The control means determines a switchable timing (stage changeable timing) at which the stage can be switched based on the progress of the music, and switches the stage at the determined switchable timing.
Therefore, the stage of play can be switched in consideration of the progress of the music being output, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
The “music piece” may be accompanied by a singing voice or may not be accompanied by a singing voice.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “stage change control” described above, the effect stage control means (the effect control device 300) performs switching lottery (stage change lottery) as to whether or not to change the effect stage. If you win the switch lottery at the switchable timing (stage change possible timing), switch the stage at the time of the win, and if you win the switch lottery before the switchable timing, It can be configured to wait for the stage to be switched until the switchable timing is reached.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the music from being cut off by changing the stage of production (stage change), so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “stage change control” described above, the effect stage control means (the effect control device 300) repeatedly outputs music corresponding to the selected effect stage from the speakers 19a and 19b. If the switching lottery is not won before the number of music repeats reaches the specified number of times (the number of loops), when the number of music repeats reaches the specified number of times, It can be configured to switch.
By comprising in this way, it can prevent staying on the same production stage. Therefore, since the player can listen to various music (music corresponding to various production stages), the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The “stage change control” is applicable not only to the pachinko gaming machine 10 but also to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.
In addition, the “Stage Change Control” function additional password is disclosed on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer, and when the password is input to the gaming machine, “Stage Change Control” can be performed. May be.
In addition, when the stage change mode switching password is disclosed on the gaming machine manufacturer's website and the password is input to the gaming machine, the stage type, stage grade, winning probability of stage change lottery, etc. are changed. You may comprise so that it may do. Furthermore, the stage change mode switching password that can be used for each predetermined period is made different so that the stage type, stage grade, stage change lottery winning probability, etc. can be changed according to each period. Also good.

[Timepiece production]
Next, the “clockwork effect” that is characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a timepiece portion 44 d 1 that simulates a timepiece, and a rotating shaft portion that has a timepiece portion 44 d 1 at the tip (free end). 44d2 is provided with a board effect device 44d. The board effect device 44d has a timepiece portion 44d1 between a first position (see FIG. 3) that does not overlap the display area of the display device 41 and a second position (see FIG. 2) that overlaps the display area of the display device 41. In addition to being able to rotate, the rotating operation of rotating the rotating shaft portion 44d2 is possible, and the rotating operation of rotating the hands of the timepiece portion 44d1 is possible.

83 to 85 are diagrams for explaining an example of “clockwork effect” in the present embodiment. In FIG. 83 to FIG. 85, “clock accessory effect” is executed as one aspect of reach effect.
As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started, the points are added to the number of points.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the display device 41 displays a year display H3 indicating the year, and a board effect device. 44d (for example, the timepiece part 44d1 is reciprocated between the first position and the third position on the second position side of the first position, 44d1 is performed to express the player's expectation for the movement to the second position. Corresponding to this turning action effect, the effect display H4 is displayed in a portion (in this example, the lower left portion) that is in the vicinity of the timepiece portion 44d1 in the display area of the display device 41. It is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit, depending on the display mode (color, size, etc.) of the effect display H4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84A, the timepiece accessory portion 44d1 moves from the first position to the second position, and in the second position (that is, in the state where the timepiece accessory portion 44d1 is in front of the display area). ) A rotation effect is produced in which the hands of the timepiece portion 44d1 rotate counterclockwise. Corresponding to this rotation effect, a display effect that dates back the year display H3 is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the year of the year display H3 goes back from the present (current year) to the nearest first stage.
When the stage does not increase any more, the display on the display device 41 changes after the timepiece portion 44d1 returns from the second position to the first position, and the SP reach corresponding to the year of the first stage is changed. To develop.

On the other hand, when the stage is further increased, as shown in FIG. 84C, the SP reach corresponding to the year of the first stage after the timepiece portion 44d1 returns from the second position to the first position. (Or after developing to SP reach corresponding to the year of the first stage), the board production device 44d performs the roaring motion effect again.
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the timepiece portion 44d1 moves from the first position to the second position, and the rotation effect in which the hands of the timepiece portion 44d1 rotate in the counterclockwise direction at the second position. Is done. Corresponding to this rotation effect, a display effect that dates back the year display H3 is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the year of the year display H3 goes back to the year of the second stage that is next to the present after the first stage.
If the stage does not increase any more, the display on the display device 41 changes as shown in FIG. 85 (c) after the watch accessory 44d1 returns from the second position to the first position, The SP reach corresponding to the two-stage year (for example, the SP reach having higher expectation than the SP reach corresponding to the first-stage year) is developed.

On the other hand, when the stage is further increased, the watch accessory 44d1 returns from the second position to the first position and then does not develop into the SP reach corresponding to the year of the second stage (or the second stage After the development of the SP reach corresponding to the year of the stage), the turning effect production by the board production device 44d is performed again.
Then, the above operation is executed up to a set stage, and the corresponding SP reach is developed.

86. As shown in FIG. 86, an effect in which the player's operation is intervened as a rotation effect in which the hands of the timepiece portion 44d1 rotate counterclockwise and a display effect in which the year of the year display H3 goes back. It is also possible to do this.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 86A, when the timepiece portion 44d1 moves from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. 86B, the top surface of the effect operation unit 550 is displayed. An operation instruction display H51 for instructing to perform a touch operation by sequentially tracing eight points other than the “TSW4” point provided in the counterclockwise direction, and an effective period display indicating the remaining time until the effective period of the touch operation ends H52 is displayed on the display device 41.
Then, when the player performs a touch operation as instructed, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), a rotation effect is produced in which the hands of the timepiece portion 44d1 rotate counterclockwise, and the year display H3. The display production goes back to the year.

In this case, the change amount of the needle or the year (the amount of rotation of the needle or the retroactive amount of the year) may correspond to, for example, the duration of the touch operation within the effective period or the touch operation amount, or the fluctuation (execution) You may make it respond | correspond to the result and fluctuation time of a special figure fluctuation display game.
In addition, the change mode of the needle and the year (how the needle rotates and how the year goes back) can be set as appropriate. For example, even if the touch operation is continuously performed, it is not changed at first ( That is, it may be a change mode in which, for example, when a touch operation is continued for a predetermined period, a change amount is changed at a stroke to a predetermined change amount without performing a rotation effect that rotates the needle or a display effect that dates back the year.

In addition, for example, when an instruction display such as “Rewind to the XX era!” Appears on the display device 41 and the touch operation is continued for a predetermined period, it is changed to the era (that is, the XX era). It is also possible to make it.
It is also possible to add a point corresponding to the amount of change in the hands and year to the number of points by combining the “timepiece effect production” and the above-mentioned “production point control”. That is, in addition to (or instead of) when the touch operation on the effect operation unit 550 continues for a predetermined condition establishment time, when the touch operation according to the operation instruction display H51 is continued, May be treated as

In addition, it is possible to perform effects as shown in FIGS. 87 to 91 as “timepiece effect effects”. 87 to 91, an effect is performed that counts the remaining time until the start of a predetermined effect (in this example, a temporary stop display effect in which a special symbol is displayed as a temporary stop (oscillating display at a fixed position)). Yes.
As shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game starts, the points are added to the number of points. Further, when the start memory of the special figure variation display game accompanied by the temporary stop display effect is generated and the game control device 100 is notified of the prefetch result of the start memory, the prefetch decorative special figure start memory display H6 corresponding to the start memory is displayed. Is displayed in the undigested start memory display area R1. In this embodiment, the pre-reading decoration special figure start memory display H6 is configured to be displayed in a display mode (for example, different color, presence / absence of rocking display) different from the display mode of other decorative special figure start memory display. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), at a predetermined timing (in this example, the timing at which the result of the change that has been executed is stopped and displayed), the pre-reading decoration special figure start memory display H6 is broken, A timer display H7 for informing the remaining time until the start of the temporary stop display effect of the variable display game based on the pre-reading decoration special figure start memory appears, and as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the next variable display is displayed. The update of the timer display H7 (countdown in this example) is started from the start of the game change. The updating of the timer display H7 is continued even if the special figure start memory is exhausted and the display position of the pre-read decoration special figure start memory display H6 is shifted, as shown in FIG. 88 (a).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the special figure variation display game based on the start memory corresponding to the prefetch decorative special figure start memory display H6 is started, the prefetch decorative special figure start memory display H6 is displayed as an undigested start memory display. While moving from the region R1 to the variation start storage display region R3, the timer display H7 is moved to a position away from the pre-reading decoration special drawing start storage display H6 and is enlarged and displayed in an enlarged state. It will be updated as it progresses.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), when the remaining time notified by the timer display H7 reaches a predetermined time, reach occurs. Even during reach occurrence, the timer display H7 is continuously updated as shown in FIG. 89 (a).

When the variation pattern of the variation is not a pattern that develops to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the timer display H7 times out, a temporary stop display effect is performed and the board effect device 44d A roaring motion effect is performed. Corresponding to this turning action effect, the effect display H4 is displayed in a portion (in this example, the lower left portion) that is in the vicinity of the timepiece portion 44d1 in the display area of the display device 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the roaring motion effect by the board effect device 44d is completed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), the variation ends, and the next special diagram variation display game is displayed. Starts.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variation is a pattern that develops to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the timer display H7 is timed up, a temporary stop display effect is performed and a board effect is produced. A rolling action effect is performed by the device 44d. In addition, an effect display H4 is displayed on the display device 41 in response to this roaring operation effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the clock effect part 44d1 moves from the first position to the second position, and the rotation effect in which the hands of the clock accessory part 44d1 rotate counterclockwise at the second position. Is done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), an operation instruction display H51 that instructs to perform a touch operation that traces the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550, and an effective period display H52 that indicates a remaining time until the effective period of the touch operation ends. Are displayed on the display device 41.

When the player performs a touch operation as instructed, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), a rotation effect is performed in which the hands of the timepiece portion 44d1 rotate counterclockwise, and the timer display H7 is displayed. A display effect of returning time is performed. Thereafter, when the valid period of the touch operation elapses, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), a time value (in this example, “60:00”) corresponding to the result of the change is displayed as the timer display H7. Is done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), after the notification effect for notifying the development to the SP reach is performed, it develops to the SP reach.
When the player does not perform the touch operation as instructed, the timer display H7 does not display the time value corresponding to the result of the change or the like (that is, “00:00” remains displayed). ), A notification effect for notifying the development to SP reach is performed, and the SP reach is developed.

  Here, in the patterns shown in FIGS. 87 to 91, the timer display H7 displayed at a position distant from the corresponding pre-reading decoration special figure start memory display H6 (that is, displayed during execution of the corresponding special figure variation display game). Only the timer display H7) can be changed according to the touch operation. For example, the timer display H7 (displayed at a position close to the corresponding pre-reading decoration special drawing start storage display H6) In other words, the timer display H7) displayed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game executed before the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game can also be changed according to the touch operation. You may do it.

  Note that it is possible to configure not only to return the time but also to advance the time by a touch operation that traces the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550. In this case, for example, the time may be returned when the direction of the touch operation is counterclockwise, and the time may be advanced when the direction of the touch operation is clockwise. In addition, by advancing the time by a touch operation, it is possible to give a privilege such as appearance of a special effect.

  It is also possible to change the speed of the rotation effect and the display effect according to the speed of the touch operation that traces the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (that is, the speed that traces the upper surface). Specifically, for example, when the speed of the touch operation is within a predetermined speed range, the display of the hands of the timepiece unit 44d1 and the display device 41 moves at the normal speed, and the speed of the touch operation is the predetermined speed. When the speed is below the speed range, the display on the hands of the timepiece portion 44d1 or the display device 41 is slow motion slower than the normal speed, and when the touch operation speed is above the predetermined speed range, It is also possible to configure so that a quick motion faster than the normal speed is displayed on the needle of the accessory part 44d1 or on the display device 41.

In this embodiment, the “clockwork effect” is performed as a reach effect or an effect of counting the remaining time until the start of a predetermined effect. However, other effects (such as a pseudo-ream effect or a step-up notice effect) ) May be used as a “clockpiece effect”.
In this embodiment, the “clockwork effect” is performed as the effect related to the change, but the “clockwork effect” may be performed over a plurality of changes.
In addition, as a “clockpiece effect”, an effect based on a series of stories is performed in one variable display game, and the progress of this story is linked to the movement of the board effect device 44d and the movement of the hands of the clock effect part 44d1. Anyway. Specifically, for example, when the production continues until the story ends (that is, when the production continues until the maximum production time) and when the production ends in the middle of the story (that is, the production time exceeds the maximum production time) If the production time is shorter, the degree of expectation is lower, and if the production continues until the maximum production time, it will be a big hit. Then, the movement of the board effect device 44d gives the player a sense of expectation that the effect will continue until the maximum effect time, or the time from the start of the effect is counted up by the hands of the clock accessory 44d. The player may be notified whether or not the production continues until the production time.
Further, although an accessory simulating an analog timepiece is used as the clock accessory portion 44d1, the present invention is not limited to this, and an accessory simulating a digital clock can also be used as the clock accessory portion 44d1.

  In the patterns shown in FIGS. 87 to 91, a timepiece is displayed as a timer display H7 on the display device 41 as a digital timepiece using a timepiece imitating an analog timepiece as the timepiece portion 44d1. . In other words, an analog clock is used for the accessory and a digital clock is used for the display, but this is not a limitation. A digital clock is used for the accessory and an analog clock is used for the display. Alternatively, a digital clock may be employed for both the accessory and display, or an analog clock may be employed for both the accessory and display.

According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “timepiece effect production” described above, in the gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value to the player when the game result is a predetermined special result, the display device 41 Is provided with an effect control device 300 that controls a display effect in the display and an operation effect in the movable effect member (board effect device 44d). It is comprised so that.
Therefore, since an effect in which an accessory and display are linked can be performed, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “clockpiece effect” described above, the effect operation unit 550 capable of detecting a counterclockwise touch operation and a clockwise touch operation by the player is provided. The movable effect member (board effect device 44d) is a role imitating a clock, and the effect control device 300 operates the movable effect member (board effect device 44d) in accordance with the direction of the player's touch operation. The time indicated by the movable effect member can be changed, the timer display H7 is displayed on the display device 41, and the time indicated by the timer display H7 is changed according to the direction of the player's touch operation. It is also possible to configure so as to be able to.
That is, in response to a touch operation that traces the top surface of the effect operation unit 550, the clock hand of the clock object (board effect device 44d) is turned, or the time displayed on the display device 41 is returned (or the time is changed). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that his / her own operation is directly involved in the game, and to enhance the interest of the game.

Note that the “timepiece effect production” is applicable not only to the pachinko gaming machine 10 but also to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.
In addition, when a password for adding a “timepiece effect” function is disclosed on a gaming machine manufacturer's website or the like and the password is input to the gaming machine, it is possible to perform “timepiece effect production”. It may be configured.

[Accuracy / Small Hit Production]
Next, the “surprise / small hit effect” that is characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, a battle effect in which the main character (own character) and the enemy character fight is executed. Specifically, first, a battle effect as a changing effect is performed during execution of the target special figure changing display game. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is 16R big hit (16R normal big hit, 16 probability big hit), a victory effect in which the hero character wins in the battle production appears, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is 16R big hit. In other cases (that is, in the case of disappointment, small hit, and sudden (2R-probable big hit)), a defeat effect in which the main character is defeated appears in the battle effect.

  Then, if the result of the special figure variation display game is an abrupt or small hit, after a defeat effect appears in the battle effect as the changing effect, during the special game state (including the small hit game state), / Battle production as “Small hit production”. When the result is uncertain, the victory effect appears in the battle effect, and when the result is a small hit, the defeat effect appears in the battle effect.

FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining an example of a battle effect in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 92A to 92C, a common battle start effect appears first regardless of the result of the battle effect (whether the victory effect appears or the defeat effect appears). At the time of the battle start effect, a display that suggests the result of the battle effect (specifically, the weapon of the main character, the background, the character that starts the attack, etc. may be changed).
Next, an attack pattern A (jump kick) effect appears as shown in FIG. 92 (d), or an attack pattern B (punch) effect appears as shown in FIG. 92 (e). Note that a plurality of types of attack pattern effects may be provided, and the degree of expectation may be suggested depending on which attack pattern effects appear.

Next, when the attack pattern A effect appears, a victory effect appears as shown in FIGS. 92 (f) and (g), or a defeat effect appears as shown in FIGS. 92 (h) and (i).
When an attack pattern B effect appears, a victory effect appears as shown in FIGS. 92 (j) and (k), or a defeat effect appears as shown in FIGS. 92 (l) and (m).
In FIGS. 92 (d) to 92 (m), the display of the variable display game with the decorative special symbols is omitted for the sake of convenience. However, FIGS. 92 (d) to 92 (m) also show FIGS. Similarly, a variable display game with decorative special symbols is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the display device 41. The same applies to FIGS. 93 to 96.

FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining a case where the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game is a 16R big hit (16R normal big hit, 16-probable big hit), and (a) is a diagram showing an example of display. , (B) is an example of a timing chart.
As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b), the effect control device 300 performs a battle effect as a changing effect during execution of the target special figure changing display game. When a victory effect appears in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), after the battle effect, a big hit effect (fanfare effect, round effect, interval effect, and ending effect) during the special game state )I do.

The big hit effect may be an effect related to the battle effect or may be an unrelated effect.
Also, there are multiple types of big hits (16R big hit, 12R big hit, 4R big hit, etc.), and it is possible to perform a battle effect as an effect to notify whether or not the special game state (round game) will continue every predetermined round It is. Specifically, for example, the battle effect is executed in the fourth round, and when the special gaming state continues, the victory effect appears in the battle effect, and when it does not continue, the defeat effect appears in the battle effect. It is also possible.
Moreover, it is also possible to perform a battle effect as an effect for notifying whether or not a probable big hit will occur in the final round or the like. Specifically, for example, when there is a probable big hit hold (that is, a special figure start memory with a result of “probable big hit”) within the undigested hold, the strongest attack pattern effect among a plurality of attack patterns It is also possible to perform battle effects such as making a victory effect appear after appearing.

FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining a case where the result of the target special figure variation display game is a surprise (2R probability variation big hit), and (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of display, (C) is an example of a timing chart.
As shown in FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (c), the effect control device 300 performs a battle effect as a changing effect during execution of the target special figure change display game, and a defeat effect appears in the battle effect. In the case where the result of the target special figure variation display game is sudden, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) and 94 (c), after the battle effect, / Battle effect (fanfare effect, round effect, interval effect, and ending effect) as a “small hit effect (specifically, a stunning effect)”.

And when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as a target is uncertain, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) and 94 (c), a victory effect appears in the battle effect. Thereby, it can be notified that the result of the special figure variation display game to be a target is accurate, that is, that a high probability state is generated after the special game state is ended.
In the second battle production (battle production as “probability / small hit production”), for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the main character such as “Still still!” You may perform the display which shows that. Also, the enemy character of the first battle effect (battle effect as a fluctuating effect) and the enemy character of the second battle effect (battle effect as a “surprise / small hit effect”) may be different.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (b) and FIG. 94 (b), the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment always has a high probability state when the jackpot operation ends (that is, a certain number of revolutions). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this, and when the jackpot operation ends, the jackpot probability state becomes a high probability state and the high probability state. It may be a specification that may not be.

FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining a case where the result of the target special figure change display game is a small hit, (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of display, and (c) It is an example of a timing chart.
As shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (c), the effect control device 300 performs a battle effect as a changing effect during execution of the target special figure change display game, and a defeat effect appears in the battle effect. If the result of the special figure change display game to be played is a small hit, as shown in FIGS. 95 (b) and 95 (c), after the battle effect, A battle effect (a fanfare effect, a round effect, an interval effect, and an ending effect) is performed as “accuracy / small hit effect (specifically, a small hit effect)”.

Then, when the result of the special figure change display game as a target is a small hit, as shown in FIGS. 95 (b) and (c), a defeat effect is caused to appear in the battle effect. Thereby, it can be notified that the result of the target special figure change display game is a small hit, that is, the high probability state does not occur after the special game state is ended.
In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, and the special time fluctuation display game is a special time. Is terminated, if the probability status of the jackpot in the target special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the jackpot is reached at the end of the target special figure fluctuation display game (that is, at time t1). Switch to a low probability state.
Note that the timing at which the result of the battle effect (the victory effect or the defeat effect) appears may be different depending on whether the battle effect is won or the game is defeated. Specifically, if the target special figure change display game result is a small hit, the defeat effect appears in the battle effect as “Accuracy / Small hit effect (small hit effect)”, and the target special figure change When the result of the displayed game is promising, a victory effect appears in the battle effect as “accuracy / small hit effect (accurate effect)”. For example, the time from the start of the battle effect until the defeat effect appears, It is also possible to make it shorter than the time from the start of the time until the victory effect appears.

Also, as shown in FIG. 96, in addition to the victory effect and the defeat effect, a draw effect can also appear.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 96, it is also possible to perform a battle effect during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game started before the target special figure fluctuation display game.

  FIG. 96 shows an example in which a special figure start memory with a result of “16R big hit” is generated, and a variable display game based on the special figure start memory is targeted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (d), first, a battle effect is performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game that is started two times before the target special figure fluctuation display game. Then, a draw effect appears in the battle effect, and then, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the execution of the special map variation display game started immediately before the target special map variation display game. A battle effect is performed inside, and a draw effect appears in the battle effect. Next, as shown in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), a battle effect as a changing effect is performed during execution of the target special figure change display game, and a victory effect appears in the battle effect. As shown in FIG. 96 (d), after the battle effect, the big hit effect is executed during the special game state.

In FIG. 96, the case where the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game is a 16R big hit is shown. However, even when the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game is other than the 16R big hit, a draw effect appears. Or, a battle effect may be performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game started before the target special figure fluctuation display game.
FIG. 96 shows a pattern in which the result of a plurality of consecutive battle effects is “Draw-Draw-Victory”, but is not limited to this, and the pattern of the results of a plurality of consecutive battle effects is The result of the battle effect (battle effect as the effect during change) performed during the execution of the target special figure change display game, and the battle effect (“surprise / small hit effect” performed when the defeat effect appears in the battle effect) If the result of “Battle production as“) corresponds to the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game, it can be changed as appropriate.

According to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “accuracy / small hit effect” described above, the effect is provided in the gaming machine that can give a player a game value when the game result is a predetermined special result. The production control device 300 is controlled, and the special results include a first special result (in the case of this embodiment, 16R big hit), a second special result (in the case of this embodiment, accuracy), and a third special result (in this case). In the case of the embodiment, the effect control device 300 performs the first effect (in the case of this embodiment, a battle effect as a changing effect) during the execution of the game, and the result of the game Indicates whether or not the result is the first special result, and when the result of the game is the second special result or the third special result, the second effect ( In the case of the present embodiment, the bar as “probability / small hit effect” Le presentation) performed suggest how the game result is the third special result whether the second special results.
Therefore, when a win occurs (when the result of the game is a special result), it is possible to perform an effect that is relevant to the direction of the effect, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the “accuracy / small hit effect” described above, if the game result is the second special result (in the case of the present embodiment), it is a special prize opening (special A special gaming state in which the variable winning device 38) is opened in a predetermined opening / closing pattern occurs, and a probability variation state in which the probability that the game result is a special result is higher than the normal probability state after the special gaming state ends. However, when the game result is the third special result (in the case of the present embodiment, a small hit), a special game state in which the special winning opening is opened with the predetermined opening / closing pattern occurs, and the special game state It is possible to configure so that the probability variation state does not occur after completion.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to indicate whether or not a probable change state will occur after the end of the special game state by the second effect (battle effect as “surprise / small hit effect”). It can enhance interest.
The first special result is not limited to 16R big hit and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second special result is not limited suddenly and can be changed as appropriate. The third special result is not limited to small hits, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 that can execute the “surprise / small hit effect” described above, the effect control device 300 is started before the game that performs the first effect (battle effect as a changing effect). During the execution of one or a plurality of games, it is possible to perform a related effect (battle effect) related to the first effect.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform effects related to each other over a plurality of games, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  The control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described including the processing for enabling the effect as described above. Control processing by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes main processing shown in FIG. 97 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 97, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect operation unit 550 (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is performed. The input from the effect operation unit 550 is read in the timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect operation unit 550, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

Next, hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting of changeable range such as brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal, setting of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by player, and setting to enable production (Step C10).
Next, a production point control process (step C11) and a stage change control process (step C12) are performed, and a random number update process (step C13) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game. .

  Next, a reception command check process (step C14) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C15) for editing the settings for controlling the progress of the effect and the drawing command. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C16). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem. In addition, designation | designated of the display mode of an even number design is performed by effect display edit processing (step C15).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is frame switching timing (step C17). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C17 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C17; N), the process of step C17 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C17 that it is the frame switching timing (step C17; Y), a screen drawing is instructed (step C18).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C19) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C19) for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc. C20), a movable body control process (step C21) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing WDT (step C8).

[Direction point control processing]
Next, the details of the effect point control process (step C11) in the main process described above will be described. By the above-described “direction point control”, when the variation of the decoration special figure variation display game starts, when the pre-reading effect for the point addition target is executed, when the variation effect for the point addition target is executed, and when the button operation for the point addition target is continued When the number of acquired points reaches the bonus target value, it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and a predetermined point is added to the number of points. Add.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the effect point control process, first, it is determined whether or not it is at the start of the variation of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 (step C101).
When it is determined in step C101 that it is not the time of starting the variation of the decorative special figure variation display game (step C101; N), the process proceeds to step C103.
On the other hand, if it is determined at step C101 that the decoration special figure variation display game is at the start of variation (step C101; Y), it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and the variation start point (of the present embodiment) is determined. In this case, 1 point (see FIG. 66C)) is added to the number of points (step C102).

Next, it is determined whether or not a point-ahead target pre-reading effect is being executed (step C103).
If it is determined in step C103 that the point addition target prefetch effect is not being executed (step C103; N), the process proceeds to step C105.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C103 that the point-ahead target prefetch effect is being executed (step C103; Y), it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and the point corresponding to the effect is added to the number of points. (Step C104).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation effect to be subjected to point addition is being executed (step C105).
If it is determined in step C105 that it is not at the time of execution of the variation effect subject to point addition (step C105; N), the process proceeds to step C107.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C105 that the point-targeted variation effect is being executed (step C105; Y), it is determined that the point addition condition is satisfied, and the point corresponding to the effect is set to the number of points. Add (step C106).

Next, it is determined whether or not a button operation condition for point addition is satisfied (step C107).
If it is determined in step C107 that the button operation condition for point addition is not satisfied (step C107; N), the process proceeds to step C109.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C107 that the button operation condition to be added with points is satisfied (step C107; Y), that is, when the button operation to be added with points is continued, the point addition condition is satisfied. Determination is made and the point corresponding to the operation is added to the number of points (step C108).

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired points has reached the bonus target value (step C109).
If it is determined in step C109 that the number of acquired points is not the bonus target value (step C109; N), the process proceeds to step C111.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C109 that the acquired point number has reached the bonus target value (step C109; Y), the corresponding bonus point is added to the point number (step C110).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation stop state (customer waiting state) of the decoration special figure variation display game has continued for 10 seconds (step C111).
In Step C111, when it is determined that the variation stop state of the decoration special figure variation display game has not continued for 10 seconds (Step C111; N), the effect point control process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C111 that the variation stop state of the decoration special figure variation display game has continued for 10 seconds (step C111; Y), that is, if the second time point is reached, the number of acquired points is cleared. (Step C112), the effect point control process is terminated.

[Stage change control processing]
Next, details of the stage change control process (step C12) in the main process described above will be described. When the stage change lottery is won by the “stage change control” described above, the stage change (switching of the production stage) is performed “after the chorus part” of the BGM. In this stage change control process, Set up for stage changes. Here, a stage change control process when performing a stage change with the pattern shown in FIG. 79 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the stage change control process, first, it is determined whether or not a stage change flag is set (step C201).
If it is determined in step C201 that the stage change flag is set (step C201; Y), the process proceeds to step C207.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C201 that the stage change flag has not been set (step C201; N), it is determined whether or not the decoration special-figure display game on the display device 41 starts to change (step C202). .

If it is determined in step C202 that it is not the time of starting the variation of the decorative special figure variation display game (step C202; N), the stage change control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined at step C202 that the decoration special symbol variation display game is at the start of variation (step C202; Y), the current stage information, the number of acquired points, the production mode, the symbol type, and the variation information are displayed. A corresponding stage change distribution table is set (step C203). The symbol type is information on a stopped symbol that has started to fluctuate. Examples of the symbol type include a loss symbol, a 16R probability variable big hit symbol, a 16R normal big hit symbol, a 2R probability variable big hit symbol, and a small hit symbol. The fluctuation information is information including the type of reach.
Here, the stage change distribution table is configured to take into account the current number of points acquired, but this allows, for example, the distribution ratio to the special stage to be changed according to the number of points. Become.

  Next, a stage change lottery (normal stage change lottery and special stage change lottery) is performed using the set stage change distribution table (step C204), and whether or not the stage change (normal stage change or special stage change) is won. Is determined (step C205). For example, if the effect currently being executed is an effect that cannot be duplicated with a stage change (stage change effect), whether or not to set a stage change distribution table that is not won for the stage change in step C203 Alternatively, this is dealt with by not performing the stage change lottery in step C204.

  Here, in this embodiment, the stage change lottery is not performed when the stage stage during the stay is a special stage, and the stage change lottery is performed only when the current stage is a normal stage. . Therefore, if it is determined that the stage stage during the stay is a special stage based on the current stage information, the stage change lottery is not performed in step C204.

If it is determined in step C205 that the stage change is not won (step C205; N), the stage change control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C250 that the stage change has been won (step C205; Y), a stage change flag is set (step C206). In step C206, the destination stage information that can determine the destination stage is set together with the stage change flag. When the normal stage change lottery is won, the transition stage production stage becomes the next normal stage, and when the special stage change lottery is won, the transition stage production stage becomes the special stage.

Next, the progress status of the BGM is checked (step C207), and it is determined whether or not it is a stage changeable timing (step C208). In this embodiment, since the stage change is performed “after the chorus part is finished”, it is checked in step C207 whether the chorus end timer set in step C212 is up, and the time is up. For example, it is determined in step C208 that the stage change timing is reached.
In this embodiment, the stage change is performed “after the end of the rust portion”. However, for example, the stage change may be performed “at the end of the outro portion”. In this case, if the BGM end timer set in step C213 has expired, it is determined that it is the stage changeable timing.

  Further, for example, the stage changeable timing may be varied depending on the BGM. That is, for example, as a BGM, a BGM that performs a stage change “after the chorus part ends”, a BGM that performs a stage change “at the end of the outro part”, and a BGM that can perform a stage change unconditionally May be prepared. In this case, if the BGM being output is a BGM that performs a stage change “after the end of the rust portion”, it is determined that the stage change is possible when the rust end timer is up, and the BGM being output is determined. If the BGM performs a stage change at the “outro part end”, it is determined that the stage change is possible when the BGM end timer is up, and the BGM being output unconditionally changes the stage. If it is possible to perform BGM, it is determined that it is the stage changeable timing regardless of whether the rust end timer or the BGM end timer is up.

If it is determined at step C208 that the stage change timing is not possible (step C208; N), the stage change control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C208 that the stage change is possible (step C208; Y), the stage change flag is cleared (step C209).

Next, display setting of the stage to be changed is performed (step C210), and reproduction setting of the stage BGM to be changed is performed (step C211). The stage to be changed (migration destination stage) can be specified based on the migration destination stage information. Note that when the display setting of the stage to be changed and the reproduction setting of the stage BGM to be changed are performed, the transfer destination stage information and the like may be cleared.
Next, a rust end timer corresponding to the stage BGM to be changed is set (step C212), a BGM end timer corresponding to the stage BGM to be changed is set (step C213), and the stage change control process is ended. The rust end timer and the BGM end timer are updated at a predetermined timing. A timer other than the chorus end timer and the BGM end timer can be set.

In the case of the present embodiment, the same BGM can be repeatedly output up to the upper limit of the number of loops (see FIG. 77 (a)) while staying in one normal stage. Therefore, along with the setting of the timer in step C212 or step 213, A loop counter is set.
For example, when the stage shifts to an effect stage where the number of BGM loops is 3, in step C212, a rust end timer is set (the time from the start of the intro portion to the end of the rust portion is set in the rust end timer), and the step In C213, the BGM end timer is set (the time from the start of the intro part to the end of the outro part is set in the BGM end timer), and “1” is set in the loop number counter. Each time the BGM end timer counts up, the rust end timer and the BGM end timer are set, and the loop number counter is updated by +1, and this is repeated until the value of the loop number counter becomes “3”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the stage change lottery is not won before the automatic switching condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift to the next normal stage when the automatic switching condition is satisfied. . Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the stage change is not won (step C205; N), it is determined whether or not the automatic switching condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the automatic switching condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step C210. The process of ~ C213 is performed.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (step C14) in the main process described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of received commands ( Step C301), it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C302). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C302; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the command reception number is not 0 (step C302; Y), the command reception counter area is subtracted by the command reception number (step C303).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C304), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C305), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C306). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C306 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C306; N), the process returns to step C304. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C306; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C307), and the received command analysis process (step C308) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C309), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C310). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C310; N), the process returns to step C307. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C310; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step C308) in the received command check process described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C321), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range. (Step C322, Step C323). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C322; Y, step C323; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C324).

  If it is determined in step C322 or step C323 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C322; N, step C323; N), or if it is determined in step C324 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C324; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C324 that the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C324; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C325). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C325; Y), the variable command process (step C326) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C325 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C325; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C327). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command for an operation related to a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C327; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C328) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C327 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C327; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C329). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C329; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C330) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C329 that MODE is not in the range of symbol-related commands (step C329; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command or an error command. (Step C331). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C331; Y), the single command processing (step C332) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C331 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C331; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C333). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (step C333; Y), the pre-read symbol system command process (step C334) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C333 that MODE is not within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C333; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the pre-read variation command (step C335). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C335; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C336) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is determined in step C335 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C335; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single command processing]
Next, details of the single command processing (step C332) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the MODE specifies a model (step C401).
If it is determined in step C401 that MODE designates a model (step C401; Y), a model setting process (step C402) for setting the model is performed, and the one-shot command process is terminated. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C401 that MODE does not designate a model (step C401; N), it is determined whether or not MODE instructs RAM initialization (step C403).

If it is determined in step C403 that MODE is for instructing RAM initialization (step C403; Y), the RAM initialization for executing processing corresponding to power-on with RAM initialization in the game control device 100 is executed. Is performed (step C404), and the single command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C403 that MODE does not command RAM initialization (step C403; N), it is determined whether MODE commands power failure recovery (step C405).
If it is determined in step C405 that MODE is a command for power failure recovery (step C405; Y), a power failure recovery setting process (step C406) for executing processing related to power failure recovery is performed, and a single command processing is performed. Exit.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C405 that the MODE does not command a power failure recovery (step C405; N), it is determined whether the MODE commands a customer waiting demonstration (step C407).

If it is determined in step C407 that the MODE is for instructing a customer waiting demo (step C407; Y), a customer waiting demo setting process (step C408) for executing processing related to the start of the customer waiting state is performed. The single command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C407 that the MODE does not command a customer waiting demonstration (step C407; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the special figure 1 holding system (step C409). .
If it is determined in step C409 that MODE is within the range of the special figure 1 holding system (step C409; Y), the special figure 1 holding information setting process for executing storage of information relating to the holding of special figure 1 (step S409) C410) is performed, and the single-shot command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C409 that MODE is not within the special figure 1 reserved system range (step C409; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the special figure 2 reserved system range (step C411). .

If it is determined in step C411 that MODE is within the range of the special figure 2 reservation system (step C411; Y), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process for storing information related to the special figure 2 reservation (step S411) C412) is performed and the single-shot command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C411 that MODE is not in the special figure 2 reserved system range (step C411; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the probability information system range (step C413).
If it is determined in step C413 that MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C413; Y), a probability information setting process (step C414) for executing a process such as setting an effect corresponding to the probability state is performed. To complete the single command processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C413 that MODE is not in the range of the probability information system (step C413; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the error / invalid system range (step C415).

If it is determined in step C415 that the MODE is within the error / illegal system range (step C415; Y), an error / illegal setting process (step C416) for executing a process such as error notification is performed. System command processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C415 that the MODE is not in the error / illegal system range (step C415; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is a command for effect mode switching (step C417).
If it is determined in step C417 that MODE is a command for effect mode switching (step C417; Y), an effect mode switching setting process (step C418) for executing processes such as effect mode switching is performed. The single command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C417 that the MODE does not command the effect mode switching (step C417; N), it is determined whether the MODE commands the symbol stop (step C419).

If it is determined in step C419 that MODE does not command symbol stop (step C419; N), the single command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C419 that the MODE is for commanding symbol stop (step C419; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol stop command (step C420).
If it is determined in step C420 that the command is not a normal symbol stop command (step C420; N), the single-shot command is terminated. The symbol stop command is divided into special figure 1 and special figure 2.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C420 that the command is a normal symbol stop command (step C420; Y), the corresponding special symbol is set to stop (step C421). If all symbols are stopped, the gaming state flag is set. The normal state is set (step C422), and the single command processing is terminated. In addition to the normal state, the game state flag includes a changing flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, and the like.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, details of the look-ahead design command processing (step C334) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the look-ahead design command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C501). That is, it is determined whether the latest prefetched symbol command received this time relates to the first start memory.
When the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C501; Y), that is, when it relates to the first start memory, the latest prefetched symbol command received this time is the special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. 1 Save in the pre-read symbol command area (step C502), set the pre-read variation command reception wait flag (step C504), and end the pre-read symbol command processing.

On the other hand, when the latest hold information is not special figure 1 hold (step C501; N), that is, related to the second start memory, the latest prefetched symbol command received this time is the special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number. 2 is saved in the prefetch symbol command area (step C503), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C504), and the prefetch symbol command processing is terminated.
The reason why the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C504 is that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, details of the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C336) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the prefetch fluctuation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch fluctuation command reception is awaited (step C601). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is awaiting.
If the prefetch fluctuation command reception is not awaited (step C601; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C601; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C602).

Thereafter, in the processes of steps C603 to C606, a process of converting the prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed.
First, a process (step C603) for setting a prefetch variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of retained symbols in the latest pending information is performed (step C603), and a special type of start memory corresponding to the prefetch variation command received this time (see FIG. 1). Alternatively, a MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the information of the special figure 2) and the current number of reservations of the special figure type.
Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C604).
Next, the prefetching variation ACT conversion table is set (step C605), and the sub-prefetching conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetching variation command is acquired (step C606).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time.
Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the pre-reading notice effect without being influenced by the number of holds at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of holds.
For example, there is a possibility of a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation without reach and a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation. It is converted into MODE divided according to matters to be considered in the setting of the prefetching notice effect, so that the process of the prefetching notice effect can be performed easily and reliably.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination.
However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, the final stop symbol is set to the stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, the stop that stops one frame ahead, and the hit case, so various types of reach can be used for the same type of reach. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide.
For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number and reducing the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading notice effect processing.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C607).
If the converted MODE and ACT are not other than 0 (step C607; N), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated because the command value is abnormal.
On the other hand, if the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C607; Y), the converted command is the latest hold information, the prefetch change command area corresponding to the hold number (see FIG. 2 is saved (step C408), and a prefetch command consistency check process (step C609) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal or not is performed.

As a result of the prefetch command matching check process (step C609), if the command combination is not normal (step C610; N), the prefetch variation command process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C610; Y), the latest pending information to be prefetched (information on the latest pending number including the category of special figure 1 or special figure 2) is loaded (step C611). ), A pre-read lottery process (step C612) for lottery execution of the pre-read notice effect is performed to determine whether or not a pre-read notice effect is generated (step C613).

If no prefetching notice effect is generated (step C613; N), the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C613; Y), when the prefetching effect selected in the prefetching lottery process (step C612) is the prefetching effect subject to point addition, it corresponds to the selected prefetching effect. Point information to be set is set (step C614). The points based on the point information set (saved) in step C614 are points corresponding to the point-reading prefetch effect at a predetermined point addition timing (ie, in step C104 of the effect point control process (FIG. 98)). , Added to the number of points.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the generated prefetching notice effect (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C612)) is an effect that starts immediately (step C615). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. An effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed during the execution of a special figure fluctuation display game, which produces a specific effect or reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a pre-reading notice effect of changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display at a timing later than the current time, and the like. The timing of starting the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately is that the special figure fluctuation display game is ended if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. Applicable timing.

If it is not an effect that starts immediately (step C615; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure change display game that executes a prefetch notice effect.
On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C615; Y), a display corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is set (step C616), and the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.

  Pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) for which the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what variation pattern is to be obtained) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal mode, or the display device 41 For example, an effect display is performed. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern or a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance. To the effect control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Design command processing]
Next, details of the symbol-based command process (step C330) in the received command analysis process described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the symbol system command processing, first, a special figure type (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C701), and it corresponds to a combination of MODE and ACT. The symbol type is set and saved (step C702), and the symbol command processing is terminated.

  The symbol type is a symbol category such as an off symbol, a 16R probability variable big hit symbol, a 16R normal big hit symbol, a 2R probability variable big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and the like, and is associated with ACT data. Since the ratio of symbols varies between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to MODE data from a plurality of symbol type setting tables. And the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command process (step C326) in the received command analysis process described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in the variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C801). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C701 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

  If this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C801; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. When the special figure type is not yet determined (step C801; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C802), and the variation command and the symbol type are determined. It is determined whether they are inconsistent (step C803).

  If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C803; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C803; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C804). The symbol type means a category of symbols. Examples of the symbol type include an off symbol, a 16R probability variable big hit symbol, a 16R normal big hit symbol, a 2R probability variable big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and the like. In the case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, an effect such as when the symbol command of the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is received although the deviation variation command (variation pattern command) is received. This means that the combination is inconsistent (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type).

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C804), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C805).

  Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C806). Here, during the special map change, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit or during a fanfare, etc.). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by −1 (a process for reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C807), and the variable command process is terminated.

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, the details of the changing effect setting process (step C805) in the above-described changing command process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 107, in the variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C811). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C811; Y), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the current number of acquired points, model code, special figure type, and production mode is set (step C812). ). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without reach, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and there is no need to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time reduction mode, a latent mode, and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different are provided.

  Next, with reference to the first half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure type holds is acquired (step C813). As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effects that appear during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holds. Thereafter, a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice allocation group table (step C816).

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C811; N), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the current number of acquired points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and symbol type is set. (Step C814). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C815), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. A lottery for a notice to appear at (step C816) is performed.

  Next, in step C817 to step C819, a notice change effect of the latter half change is lottery. Note that the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which a display area excluding a specific area out of a plurality of display areas of the special figure is a big hit) Is a variable display in a state in which the variable is displayed only in a specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the current number of acquired points, model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C817). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the second half notice allocation group table address corresponding to the ACT is obtained by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C818), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for notice of appearance is performed (step C819).

Next, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C820). Since the change time and main reach contents are known from the change command (MODE, ACT), the contents (effect mode) of the change effect are determined based on the change time.
Next, the contents of the effect corresponding to the result of the notice lottery performed in step C819 are determined (step C821), and stop symbol setting processing is performed (step C822).
Next, display setting of the variation effect is performed based on the content of the variation effect determined in step C820 (step C823), and display setting of the notice effect is performed based on the content of the effect determined in step C821 (step C824). .
Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C825). As a result, an animation (moving image) in which the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game executed this time is set is set.

Next, a voice number indicating the type of BGM output from the speakers 19a and 19b and a decoration number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C826).
Next, display setting of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C827), display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C828), and the variation effect setting process is performed. finish. In step C828, when the fourth symbol is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, the display is set on the display device 41. When the fourth symbol is displayed with the LED, the LED is displayed. Set the display of.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the stop symbol setting process (step C822) in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described. When changing the display mode of the even symbol from the non-probability display mode to the probabilistic display mode by the above-mentioned “probability / non-probability switching control”, the change target symbol is forcibly stopped or displayed, When “0” is set to “0” (that is, when the display mode of the even symbol is restored), “0” that is the even symbol whose display mode changes to the probability change display mode is forcibly stopped and displayed first. However, in this stop symbol setting process, a setting for forcibly stopping and displaying a desired symbol is performed.

As shown in FIG. 108, in the stop symbol setting process, first, a stop symbol setting table corresponding to the current number of acquired points, model code, special symbol type, effect mode, symbol type, variable effect content, and notice effect content is created. Set (step C831).
Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol type is a missing symbol (step C832). If the symbol type is not a missing symbol (step C832; N), the process proceeds to step C837.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is an out-of-order symbol (step C832; Y), it is determined whether or not the decorative special figure 1 holding number and the decorative special figure 2 holding number are both zero (step C833).
If neither the number of decoration special figure 1 hold and the number of decoration special figure 2 hold are 0 (step C833; N), the process proceeds to step C835.
On the other hand, when the number of the special figure 1 hold and the number of the special figure 2 hold are both 0 (step C833; Y), that is, the special figure start memory number is “0”, and the next special figure variation display game is executed. If the special symbol start memory to be generated is not stored, the symbol display mode is changed to a stop symbol setting table for symbol display mode return (in this embodiment, symbol color return) (step C834). As a result, the stop symbol setting table set in step C831 is changed to a symbol group table having the same system as the table and always including a desired symbol. In the case of the present embodiment, the desired symbol is an even symbol whose display mode first changes to the probability change display mode.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired points is scheduled to reach a display mode change target value (in this embodiment, a color change target value) (step C835).
When it is determined that the number of acquired points is not scheduled to reach the color change target value (step C835; N), the process proceeds to step C837.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of acquired points is scheduled to reach the color change target value (step C835; Y), that is, the acquired number of points is a specified value (in this embodiment, “100”, “300”, or If it is scheduled to reach “1000” (see FIG. 66 (b)), it is changed to a stop symbol setting table for symbol display mode change (in this embodiment, symbol color change) (step C 836). . As a result, the stop symbol setting table set in step C831 is changed to a symbol group table having the same system as the table and always including a desired symbol. In the case of this embodiment, the desired symbol is “0” when the number of acquired points is scheduled to reach “100” of the color change target values, and the acquired point number is of the color change target values. “300” is “6”, and when the number of acquired points is to reach “1000” of the color change target values, it is “2”.

Next, a design determining random number is extracted (step C837), and a stop symbol is acquired based on the stop symbol setting table and the extracted symbol determining random number (step C838).
Next, the acquired stop symbol is saved in the stop symbol region corresponding to the special symbol type (decoration special symbol 1 or decorative special symbol 2) (step C839), and the stop symbol setting process is terminated.
In this embodiment, all symbol combinations (left / middle / right symbol combinations) are defined on the stop symbol setting table, and one of the symbol combinations as a stop symbol based on the table and the symbol determining random number. For example, the left symbol (the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left variation display area), the middle symbol (the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle variation display region), the right symbol (the symbol that stops in the right variation display area) You may comprise so that it may acquire so that it may become a desired combination with a random number).

[Big hit command processing]
Next, details of the jackpot command process (step C328) in the received command analysis process described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE is a fanfare (step C901).
If it is determined that the MODE is a fanfare (step C901; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting the effect during the fanfare is performed (step C902), the P machine state is set to the fanfare (step C903), and the big hit system Ends command processing.
If it is determined that the MODE is not a fanfare (step C901; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C904).

When it is determined that the MODE is a round (step C904; Y), a round effect setting process for setting an effect during the round is performed (step C905), and the P machine state is set to the round (step C906). Terminates command processing.
If it is determined that the MODE is not a round (step C904; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C907).

When it is determined that MODE is an interval (step C907; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C908), the P machine state is set to the interval (step C909), and the big hit system Terminates command processing.
If it is determined that the MODE is not an interval (step C907; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an ending (step C910).

When it is determined that the MODE is an ending (step C910; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an effect during the ending is performed (step C911), and the P machine state is set to the ending (step C912), and the big hit system Terminates command processing.
If it is determined that the MODE is not an ending (step C917; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated.

[Fanfare production setting processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare effect setting process (step C902) in the above jackpot command processing will be described. In the fanfare effect setting process, settings for executing the above-described “probability / small hit effect” are performed.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether ACT is a big hit fanfare (16R big hit fanfare) (step C921).
When it is determined that ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C921; Y), the number of big hits is updated by +1 (step C922). The number of jackpots is when the hit series is interrupted (such as at the end of the last fluctuation in the special time (ST) state where only a specific number of revolutions is set to a high probability state, or at the end of the last fluctuation in the short-time state, etc.) If there is a normal jackpot that does not occur, it may be at the end of the ending.)

Next, the display content of the jackpot fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the number of jackpots (step C923), the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined display content is performed (step C924), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. To do.
In addition to the probability status and the number of big hits, it is also possible to determine the display contents of the big hit fanfare effect in consideration of the determination result of whether or not it is a battle effect (continuous effect) as a changing effect. is there. When the battle effect (continuous effect) is performed in the current effect during change (the effect during change performed immediately before (most recently)), it is determined that the win is from the continuous effect. By considering the determination result of whether or not the battle effect (continuous effect) is a hit, it is possible to perform a big hit effect related to the battle effect.

If it is determined that the ACT is not a big hit fanfare (step C921; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a sudden fanfare (2R probability variable big hit fanfare) (step C925).
If it is determined that the ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C925; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a win from a battle effect (continuous effect) as a changing effect (step C926). In addition, even when ACT is a sudden fanfare, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

When it is determined that it is not a hit from the continuous performance (step C926; N), that is, when the battle performance (continuous performance) is not performed in the current variation effect (the variation effect executed immediately before (most recently)), A rush-specific effect corresponding to the probability state is determined, a fanfare effect display setting corresponding to the determined credibility-only effect is set (step C927), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated.
Note that, in the round effect setting process (step C905), the interval effect setting process (step C908), and the ending effect setting process (step C911), the display setting and the interval of the round effect corresponding to the accompaniment-only effect determined in step C927, respectively. Production display settings and ending production display settings are performed.

Further, when it is determined that the winning is from the continuous performance (step C926; Y), that is, when the battle performance (continuous performance) is performed with the current variation performance (the variation performance performed immediately before (most recently)). Determines a surprise effect (for example, a battle effect in which a victory effect appears) to be executed from among the surprise effect patterns related to the current changing effect by lottery (step C928), and a fanfare effect corresponding to the determined surprise effect Is set (step C929), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated.
In the round effect setting process (step C905), the interval effect setting process (step C908), and the ending effect setting process (step C911), the display setting of the round effect corresponding to the sudden effect determined in step C928 and the interval effect, respectively. Display setting and ending effect display setting. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect related to the current changing effect as a surprise effect (for example, a battle effect in which a victory effect appears).

When it is determined that the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C925; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C930).
If it is determined that ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C930; N), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C930; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a win from a battle effect (continuous effect) as a changing effect (step C931).

When it is determined that the winning is not from the continuous effect (step C931; N), the small hit exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is determined, and the display of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined small hit exclusive effect is performed ( Step C932), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated.
In the round effect setting process (step C905), the interval effect setting process (step C908), and the ending effect setting process (step C911), the display setting of the round effect corresponding to the small hit exclusive effect determined in step C932, The display setting for the interval effect and the display setting for the ending effect are performed.

When it is determined that the winning is from the continuous effect (step C931; Y), the small hit effect (for example, the defeat effect appears) executed from the small hit effect pattern related to the current changing effect. (Battle effect) is determined by lottery (step C933), display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined small hit effect is performed (step C934), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated.
In the round effect setting process (step C905), the interval effect setting process (step C908), and the ending effect setting process (step C911), the display setting of the round effect corresponding to the small hit effect determined in step C933 and the interval, respectively. Production display settings and ending production display settings are performed. Thereby, as a small hit effect (for example, a battle effect in which a defeat effect appears), an effect related to the current changing effect can be performed.

  If the result is abrupt, the jackpot probability state changes from a low probability state to a high probability state, so the sudden effect (for example, a battle effect in which a victory effect appears) is an effect that suggests the occurrence of a high probability state. . On the other hand, if the result is a small hit, the big hit probability state does not change from the low probability state to the high probability state, but there may be a small hit during the high probability state. Appearing battle effects) do not become effects that suggest a low probability state. However, if the continuous effect is performed only in the low probability state, the small hit effect can be an effect suggesting the low probability state.

<Modification>
The update of the number of high probability fluctuations may be performed not at the start of the small hitting operation but at the end of the small hitting operation.
Here, the high probability variation number is the number of times that the special figure variation display game is executed during the special time (the number of STs).
Specifically, instead of the special figure display process shown in FIG. 39, the special figure display process shown in FIG. 111 is performed, and instead of the small hit end process shown in FIG. 60, the small hit end process shown in FIG. In place of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 shown in FIG. 61, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 shown in FIG. 113 may be performed.

[Special figure display processing]
In the special figure display process of this modification, as shown in FIG. 111, the high probability variation frequency update process (step A726), the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved as the special figure game mode flag. The process of saving in the area (step A733) is not performed.

[Small hit end processing]
In the small hit end process of this modification, as shown in FIG. 112, instead of the process of loading the flag from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), the high probability variation number update process ( Step A1601a) is performed, and instead of the processing (Step A1602) for determining whether or not the loaded flag is a flag relating to the high probability of special figure, the processing for determining whether or not the special drawing is high probability (high probability state) (Step A1602a), a process for loading a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and a process for determining whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure short time (short time state) (step A1620) In place of), a process (step A1620a) for determining whether or not the special drawing is in a short time (in a short time state) is performed. It is configured.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 of this modification, as shown in FIG. 113, the process (step A1637) for clearing the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is not performed.

In the case of this modification, when the result of the target special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit and the special time ends in the target special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure to be the target If the jackpot probability state in the variable display game is a high probability state, the jackpot probability state is switched to the low probability state at the end of the small hit action (ie, at time t6 (see FIG. 95C)).
As in this modification, by performing the update of the number of high probability fluctuations at the end of the small hit operation, such as processing to update the ST number at the start of the small hit operation and processing to save the special figure game mode flag, Since it is not necessary to perform processing for changing the probability state, the processing load can be reduced.
Further, since the high probability state continues until the small hitting operation is completed, it is more advantageous for the player.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and for example, other pachinko gaming machines such as one type and two types of pachinko gaming machines. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use gaming balls such as machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and sparrow ball gaming machines. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 Gaming machines 19a, 19b Speaker 38 Special variable prize device (big prize opening)
41 display device 100 game control device (probability change state generating means)
300 effect control device (effect control means, point giving means, effect stage control means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine capable of giving a game value to a player when a game result is a predetermined special result,
A display device capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A stage selected from a plurality of stage stages can be set, and music corresponding to the selected stage can be output from a speaker , and the stage can be switched according to the progress of the music. Production stage control means for determining the switchable timing ,
The music includes a first section and a second section after the first section,
The production stage control means includes:
It is possible to output the first section and the second section a plurality of times by repeatedly outputting the music from the speaker.
When the progress status of the music is the first section of the first time, the effect stage is switched after the end of the first section, and when the progress status of the music is the first section of the second time or later. When the stage is switched to the first section and the progress of the music is the first section and the second section after the second section, the switchable timing is set so that the stage is switched to the second section. Decide
In the selected stage, when the display device is executing an effect specific to the selected stage that can suggest that the result of the game becomes a special result during the execution of the game, the switching is performed. Even if it is possible timing, do not switch from the selected stage to another stage,
In the selected stage, when the display device is executing a common stage that can suggest that the result of the game becomes a special result during the execution of the game, the switching is performed. A gaming machine that can be switched from the selected stage to another stage at a possible timing. The production stage control means includes:
A switching lottery for determining whether or not to switch the stage is possible,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the switching lottery is won before the switchable timing, the game machine waits for switching of the effect stage until the switchable timing is reached. The production stage control means includes:
A switching lottery for determining whether or not to switch the stage is possible,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the switching lottery is not executed when it is not the switchable timing.